You are on page 1of 364

Baker Hughes INTEQ

Volume 1

DEAP v3.0

User Reference Manual


Core Applications: Data Entry and Initialization

80494H-001 Rev. B January 1997

Baker Hughes INTEQ


Technical Support and Marketing
P.O. Box 670968
Houston, TX 77267-0968
USA
713-625-6676
This manual is provided without any warranty of any kind, either expressed
or implied. The information in this document is believed to be accurate;
however, Baker Hughes INTEQ will not be liable for any damages, whether
direct or indirect, which results from the use of any information contained
herein.
Table of Contents - Volume 1

Chapter 1
Introduction to DEAP
System Overview ........................................................................................1 - 2
DEAP Basics...............................................................................................1 - 6
Application Launcher .................................................................................1 - 14
User Defaults ..............................................................................................1 - 15
Time And Date Window.............................................................................1 - 16
File Operations............................................................................................1 - 17
Editing Hole And String Component Tables..............................................1 - 19
Report Generator.........................................................................................1 - 20
Graphical Report Viewer ............................................................................1 - 22
DEAP Currency Codes ...............................................................................1 - 24
Hole Geometry And Well Geometry Definitions .......................................1 - 25
Target Vertex Location Conventions..........................................................1 - 26
DEAP Geodetic Co-ordinate Conversions .................................................1 - 27
Safety And Good Engineering Practice ......................................................1 - 29
BHA Nominalization ..................................................................................1 - 29
Glossary ......................................................................................................1 - 32

Chapter 2
Default Unit Conversion
Overview.....................................................................................................2 - 2

Chapter 3
Rig Initialization
Overview.....................................................................................................3 - 2
Application Main Window .........................................................................3 - 2
Rig Equipment ............................................................................................3 - 4

Reference Guide i
80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Table of Contents - Volume 1 DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Rotary Equipment .......................................................................................3 - 4


Mud Equipment ..........................................................................................3 - 5
Pump Equipment.........................................................................................3 - 6
Bulk Storage ...............................................................................................3 - 7
Well Control ...............................................................................................3 - 7
Rig Stability ................................................................................................3 - 8
Report..........................................................................................................3 - 9

Chapter 4
Well Initialization
Overview.....................................................................................................4 - 2
Technical Description .................................................................................4 - 3
Sidetrack Initialization ................................................................................4 - 10
Navigation...................................................................................................4 - 15
Application Main Window .........................................................................4 - 17
Field Details ................................................................................................4 - 18
Target Location Details ..............................................................................4 - 19
Geological Target Boundary.......................................................................4 - 20
Facility Details ............................................................................................4 - 21
Well Details ................................................................................................4 - 26
Allocating Rigs and Programs ....................................................................4 - 28
Sidetrack Initialization ................................................................................4 - 30
Sidetrack Naming Scheme Diagrams .........................................................4 - 33
Reports ........................................................................................................4 - 36

Chapter 5
Program Initialization
Overview.....................................................................................................5 - 2
Application Main Window .........................................................................5 - 3
Report..........................................................................................................5 - 8

ii Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Table of Contents - Volume 1

Chapter 6
Bit / BHA Actual
Overview.....................................................................................................6 - 2
Application Main Window .........................................................................6 - 3
Make Up BHA ............................................................................................6 - 4
Edit BHA ....................................................................................................6 - 4
Edit Bit Component ....................................................................................6 - 5
Bit Run/Performance ..................................................................................6 - 6
BHA Details................................................................................................6 - 7
Add BHA Component ................................................................................6 - 8
Editing BHA Components ..........................................................................6 - 9
Stabilization Details ....................................................................................6 - 10
Variable Blade Stabilizer ............................................................................6 - 11
Reports ........................................................................................................6 - 12

Chapter 7
Casing Actual
Overview.....................................................................................................7 - 2
Application Main Window .........................................................................7 - 3
Casing Details .............................................................................................7 - 3
String Details ..............................................................................................7 - 5
Wellhead Details.........................................................................................7 - 6
Centralization Details .................................................................................7 - 7
Reports ........................................................................................................7 - 8

Chapter 8
Cement Actual
Overview.....................................................................................................8 - 2
Application Main Window .........................................................................8 - 3
Hole Geometry............................................................................................8 - 3
Cementing String ........................................................................................8 - 5

Reference Guide iii


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Table of Contents - Volume 1 DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Pumping Table ............................................................................................8 - 5


Cement Volumes.........................................................................................8 - 7
Remarks Window .......................................................................................8 - 10
Reports ........................................................................................................8 - 11

Chapter 9
Geology Actual
Overview.....................................................................................................9 - 2
Application Main Window .........................................................................9 - 4
Data Import .................................................................................................9 - 10
Report..........................................................................................................9 - 15

Chapter 10
Drilling Fluid Actual
Overview.....................................................................................................10 - 2
Application Main Window .........................................................................10 - 4
Rheology .....................................................................................................10 - 5
Properties ....................................................................................................10 - 7
Chemistry....................................................................................................10 - 8
Additional Properties ..................................................................................10 - 10
Hydraulics...................................................................................................10 - 11
Concentrations ............................................................................................10 - 11
Usage ..........................................................................................................10 - 12
Solids Control .............................................................................................10 - 14
Comments ...................................................................................................10 - 14
Costs............................................................................................................10 - 15
Environmental.............................................................................................10 - 17
Reports ........................................................................................................10 - 18

iv Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Table of Contents - Volume 1

Chapter 11
Formation Integrity Test Report
Overview.....................................................................................................11 - 2
Application Main Window .........................................................................11 - 3
Well Details ................................................................................................11 - 4
Mud Details.................................................................................................11 - 5
Fit Results ...................................................................................................11 - 5
Fit Data .......................................................................................................11 - 7
Fit Results Graph ........................................................................................11 - 8
Fit Report ....................................................................................................11 - 9

Chapter 12
Progress Log
Overview.....................................................................................................12 - 2
Application Main Window .........................................................................12 - 10
Progress Log Editor ....................................................................................12 - 12
Selecting Activities .....................................................................................12 - 17
Report..........................................................................................................12 - 19

Chapter 13
Progress Log Guidelines
Overview.....................................................................................................13 - 2
Task: Anchor Rig........................................................................................13 - 6
Task: BHA Run ..........................................................................................13 - 7
Task: BOP/Riser Operations.......................................................................13 - 9
Task: Cement ..............................................................................................13 - 10
Task: Chemical Treatment..........................................................................13 - 11
Task: Coiled Tubing ...................................................................................13 - 12
Task: Commission Rig................................................................................13 - 13
Task: Derrick Management ........................................................................13 - 14
Task: Draw Down Test ...............................................................................13 - 15

Reference Guide v
80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Table of Contents - Volume 1 DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Task: Flow Well..........................................................................................13 - 16


Task: Fluid System .....................................................................................13 - 17
Task: Move Rig ..........................................................................................13 - 18
Task: Nipple Down BOP/Diverter..............................................................13 - 19
Task: Nipple Up BOP/Diverter...................................................................13 - 20
Task: Perform Integrity Test.......................................................................13 - 21
Task: Planned Maintenance ........................................................................13 - 22
Task: Pull Anchors......................................................................................13 - 23
Task: Pull Completion ................................................................................13 - 24
Task: Pull DST............................................................................................13 - 25
Task: Pull Tubulars.....................................................................................13 - 26
Task: Repair ................................................................................................13 - 27
Task: Run Completion ................................................................................13 - 28
Task: Run DST ...........................................................................................13 - 29
Task: Run Tubulars.....................................................................................13 - 30
Task: Stuck Pipe .........................................................................................13 - 31
Task: Subsea Survey...................................................................................13 - 32
Task: Suspend Operations ..........................................................................13 - 33
Task: Test Well Control Equipment ...........................................................13 - 34
Task: Tow Rig ............................................................................................13 - 35
Task: Well Control......................................................................................13 - 36
Task: Wellbore Survey ...............................................................................13 - 37
Task: Wellhead Work .................................................................................13 - 38
Task: Wireline Work ..................................................................................13 - 39
Task: Workstring Run.................................................................................13 - 40
Appendix A: Tasks and Qualifiers..............................................................13 - 42
Appendix B: Operations and Qualifiers......................................................13 - 43
Appendix C: Allocation of Operations to Tasks.........................................13 - 48

vi Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Table of Contents - Volume 1

Chapter 14
Cost Tracking
Overview.....................................................................................................14 - 2
Application Main Window .........................................................................14 - 3
Report Window...........................................................................................14 - 5

Chapter 15
Stock Control
Overview.....................................................................................................15 - 2
Application Main Window .........................................................................15 - 2
Select Item Type .........................................................................................15 - 3
Edit Item Windows .....................................................................................15 - 4
Adjusting Stock Levels ...............................................................................15 - 7
Reports ........................................................................................................15 - 8

Chapter 16
Equipment Failure
Overview.....................................................................................................16 - 2
Application Main Window .........................................................................16 - 3
File Operations............................................................................................16 - 4
Events..........................................................................................................16 - 6
Components ................................................................................................16 - 14
Summaries ..................................................................................................16 - 21
Actions ........................................................................................................16 - 22
Browsing the Data Base..............................................................................16 - 24
Report..........................................................................................................16 - 29

Chapter 17
Morning Drilling Report
Overview.....................................................................................................17 - 2
Application Main Window .........................................................................17 - 6

Reference Guide vii


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Table of Contents - Volume 1 DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Initialization Details....................................................................................17 - 7
Well Status ..................................................................................................17 - 9
Pumps..........................................................................................................17 - 11
Bit................................................................................................................17 - 11
BHA ............................................................................................................17 - 13
Drilling Fluids.............................................................................................17 - 15
Mud Log .....................................................................................................17 - 18
Well Control ...............................................................................................17 - 19
Mud and Well Costs ...................................................................................17 - 20
Bulk Materials.............................................................................................17 - 20
Safety ..........................................................................................................17 - 21
Weather .......................................................................................................17 - 23
Personnel.....................................................................................................17 - 23
Rig Response ..............................................................................................17 - 25
Logistics......................................................................................................17 - 27
Progress Log ...............................................................................................17 - 27
Surveys........................................................................................................17 - 29
Coring .........................................................................................................17 - 29
Comments ...................................................................................................17 - 30
Generating Reports .....................................................................................17 - 31
Reports ........................................................................................................17 - 32

Chapter 18
Morning Completions Report
Overview.....................................................................................................18 - 2
Application Main Window .........................................................................18 - 4
Initialization Details....................................................................................18 - 5
Completion..................................................................................................18 - 5
Production...................................................................................................18 - 6
Report..........................................................................................................18 - 7

viii Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Chapter 1

Introduction to DEAP
Figure 1-1
DEAP Road Map
Planning
Initialization
System

Daily Operations Post Well


Review

Stock
Engineering Control
Applications

Utilities
Defaults

This manual is intended as a companion guide to the


Drilling Engineering Applications Platform (DEAP)
software. The structure of the manual reflects the functional
structure of the DEAP software platform and its related
applications as closely as possible, starting with
initialization and daily operations and then going on to the
applications themselves. The road map shown above
illustrates the flow of information between the various parts
of the DEAP system.

Reference Guide 1-1


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Introduction to DEAP DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

System Overview
Introduction
DEAP is an acronym for Drilling Engineering Applications Platform, and
was designed to be a management system for drilling engineering data.
Users at the wellsite and in the office can use the system to:
• Generate daily reports
• Monitor the progress of the site
• Maintain inventories
• Provide historical profiles of well parameters and operating
parameters
• Run “what-if” simulations
• Run a wide variety of drilling engineering applications
• Monitor costs
• Plan operations at new sites.

System Architecture
The DEAP system consists of the software platform, the DEAP database
and a number of applications packages.
The basic system comes with a standard set of applications, but users can
install additional proprietary DEAP applications or they can use custom-
written applications. This modular approach allows the system to be
tailored to local requirements.

Figure 1-2
DEAP System
Applications
Architecture

Platform

Database

1-2 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Introduction to DEAP

Software Platform
The software platform acts as an interface between the user, the DEAP
database and the applications. It gives the user access to the applications
and manages the flow of data to and from the DEAP database.

DEAP Database
The DEAP database holds information about the rig, the rig inventory, the
well under development, offset wells and other wells within the same
geographical area. The database can also be loaded with data from similar
wells world-wide, if necessary. Other information enters the database via
the applications running on the platform or via the DATA REPLICATION
mechanism.
The database is managed by the software platform and can only be
accessed directly by the database administrator. All incoming data is
validated before being written into the database.

Applications
The choice of applications installed on any particular DEAP system will
depend on the activities planned for the facility. An isolated exploration
facility may only need the company man’s system installed, whereas a
large development installation would have the full range of engineering
applications.
Applications are modified dynamically to suit the nature of the rig and the
task in hand. This means that the user is only asked for the minimum of
data necessary to carry out the task.

Views of the DEAP System


Users only have access to such applications and items of data as are
relevant to their work; the applications and data form the user’s view of the
system.
The DEAP system determines the user’s access privileges at login. Those
applications to which the user has access will be presented in the menus on
the application launcher.
In addition to the applications privileges, the system also takes account of
objects which have been designated “tight”; a user may have full access to
an application, but may not be permitted to see or use data about a tight
object. The database administrator controls tight object access privileges.
Access is controlled by a system of passwords which the Database
Administrator can modify to suit local operating conditions and practices.

Reference Guide 1-3


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Introduction to DEAP DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

On the rig, passwords are allocated to a job title and not to an individual, so
holders of a job title must inform their successors of the password before
they leave their post. In town, however, each user will be allocated a
personal password.

Units and Conversion between Different Systems


Throughout the DEAP applications, choices of units are available wherever
appropriate. Values can be entered in one unit system and then converted
into their corresponding values in another by choosing an option from a
pop-up menu. Alternatively, the units can be selected before data is
entered.
The default unit conversion (DUC) application enables users to specify the
unit system which should be used for each dimension: lengths, diameters,
weights, forces and so on. There are no restrictions on the combinations of
units.
Each user is allocated a default unit conversion set, the set can be copied
from the default set for the facility or from another user, and then modified
to suit personal preferences.

Automatic Data Validation


Before data from the applications is passed to the database, it is checked to
make sure that it is within acceptable limits and that it is consistent with
data entered elsewhere.
If any of the data is unacceptable, an error box giving details of the
problem will appear so that the user can return to the appropriate section
and correct the values before running the application again.

Data Replication
This is one of the most important functions performed by the DEAP
system, although the user at the wellsite or in the office is unlikely to be
aware of it happening.
In order to ensure that users at the well site can have access to current
planning and initialization information and users in the office can access
current operational information and any wellsite changes which have been
made to the planning and initialization information, data must be
transferred between the office and the wellsite quite frequently.
Normally the replication program is run automatically in the office. Some
sites will run replication once a day in order to coincide with the time at
which the daily report is due in the office while others will run replication
more frequently, for example once an hour in order to allow office users to
see data shortly after it is entered at the wellsite.

1-4 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Introduction to DEAP

The replication program contacts each wellsite in turn and copies to the
wellsite database all planning and initialization data changes made in the
office since the last time the program was run. It then copies to the office
database all operational, planning and initialization data changes made at
the wellsite.

Figure 1-3
Rig 2
Data Rig 1
Replication

Rig 3

Office

Rig 5
Rig 4
Planning and Initialization Data
Operational Data
Planning Data Sent Back to the Office from the Rigs

Normally there is no need for staff to intervene in the process. A nominated


user or a member of the DEAP support team will receive electronic
messages informing them of the current status of the replication program.
There is a DBA utility which allows the replication program to be run on
demand for situations where the data must get to/from the wellsite quickly.
An additional DBA utility can be used to browse the list of outstanding
changes at a site and to alter the replication configuration.
If no data communications link can be created between the office and the
wellsite then the data can be copied to a file and then carried on disk or tape
between the two sites. Once it has reached the destination site it can be
loaded into the system there.
Operational data is considered to be the data which is normally created at
the wellsite. It includes data created via the casing, cement, bit/BHA, cost
tracking, drilling fluids, progress log and formation integrity test
applications.

Reference Guide 1-5


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Introduction to DEAP DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Planning and initialization data is the data which is normally created in the
office. It includes data created via the well initialization, rig initialization,
program initialization and activity and cost planning applications.

Note: A change made in the office, affecting the casing data for
a well, will not be sent back to the wellsite because casing
data is operational data and is not replicated from the
office to the wellsites.

DEAP Basics
This section describes the functions and operation of the various controls
the user will meet while using the DEAP system. The operation of the
system is intended to be as intuitive as possible, but users may be
unfamiliar with some of the special features of DEAP applications.

Data Entry Tools

The Mouse Pointer and the Data Entry Cursor


The mouse pointer (arrow-shaped pointer) is used for pointing at objects
and selecting them; the data entry cursor (shaped like an I-beam) is used to
indicate the point at which data will be inserted.

Push Button Types


Several types of push buttons are used in DEAP windows. Some of them
turn options on and off, some of them invoke menus from which options
can be selected, some invoke new windows and some instruct the system to
carry out an action.
Where a button’s function is either unavailable or inappropriate, its caption
will be greyed out and the button will be insensitive.

Toggle Buttons
Square toggle buttons turn options on and off.
The DEAP convention is that when a button is pressed in, its color will
change indicating that the option is selected. Where several options are
available, any number may be selected.

1-6 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Introduction to DEAP

Radio Buttons
Diamond shaped radio buttons allow only one option to be selected from
several. When a new choice is made, the original choice will be de-
selected.
The DEAP convention is that when a button is pressed in, its color will
change indicating that the option is selected.
In some circumstances, it may be permissible to leave all of the buttons
unselected. When it is not permissible, the application will warn the user as
soon as the window’s APPLY or SAVE button is pressed.

Figure 1-4
Types of Push
Button

Selected Unselected Selected Unselected


Toggle Buttons Radio Buttons

Push Button Design


To make the use of the system as intuitive as possible, DEAP uses the
following conventions for push buttons:

Figure 1-5
Standard
Push Button
Designs a b c
(a) By pressing one of these buttons, the user invokes a menu of
options. An option is selected by dragging the cursor down the list
and releasing the mouse button when the required option is
depressed.
(b) Buttons whose captions are followed by three dots invoke new
windows. The function of the new window will be as stated on the
button.
(c) These buttons instruct the system to carry out an action
immediately. For simplicity of operation, buttons have the standard
functions described in the following list.
This means that they always have the same effect throughout the
DEAP applications. For this reason, they will not be described
elsewhere in the user manual.

Reference Guide 1-7


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Introduction to DEAP DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

DEAP Push Button Functions


• ADD Add a new row to the bottom of the current table.
• APPLY Accept the displayed values and selections and start
processing if appropriate. The window will remain
open after the APPLY button has been clicked.
APPLY does not send the values used in the
application to the database (see SAVE).
• CANCEL Abort a course of action. Close the current window and
return the user to the parent window. CANCEL usually
accompanies a warning message.
• CLOSE Prompt the user to apply any unapplied data and then
close the window. Any data that has not been applied
will be lost.
• COPY Duplicate the selected object.
• DELETE Remove the current line from a table of data entries.
• EXIT Leave the current application; any unsaved data will be
lost.
• HELP Display help pages about the current application or
sub-application.
• INFO… Show the licence details, version numbers, etc, of the
application.
• INSERT Insert a new line above the current one in a table of
data entries.
• NEXT Display the next set of values for an item (if
appropriate).
• OK Accept the displayed values and selections and start
processing. Close the current window and return the
user to the parent window.
• PREVIOUS Display the previous set of values for an item (if
appropriate).
• RESET Return all settings and values to the state they were in
when the window was opened.
• SAVE Copy a complete set of values from an application into
the database.
• UNDO Restore the previous value or setting to the most
recently changed text field.

1-8 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Introduction to DEAP

Pick Lists

Description
A pick list holds valid entries for the adjacent text field. When the list is
particularly long, the window will be provided with a scroll bar.
The user can move rapidly to the beginning of a section of the list by typing
in the first character(s) of the required entry.
A selection is made by clicking on the entry once and then clicking on the
OK button. In some circumstances, for instance when an entirely new
object is being added, DEAP applications will permit the entry of data
directly into the text field.

Figure 1-6
Pick List
Icons

Selectable Unselectable

Scroll bars
Scroll bars are used for movement through horizontal and vertical fields of
data. An example would be a table, some of whose rows and columns were
beyond the boundaries of the window. Such a window would have both
horizontal and vertical scroll bars.

Figure 1-7
Scroll Bar

Arrow Slider Bar Scroll Region Arrow

Active areas
The background of the scroll bar represents the total extent of the data The
scroll region epresents the location and extent of the displayed data in
relation to the total amount of data.
Use the arrows to scroll incrementally in the direction of the arrow. Click
on the scroll region to move quickly through the data. Click and hold on the
slider bar to control the movement.

Reference Guide 1-9


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Introduction to DEAP DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Data Entry

Mandatory Text Fields


When the description of a subject would be incomplete without an item of
data, that item is said to be mandatory.
If the user attempts to save or apply a set of data from which a mandatory
item is missing, the system will display a warning dialogue box which
names the missing item and prompts the user to enter it before attempting
to save or apply again.
Some applications contain sets of text fields which describe a subject — an
item of rig equipment for instance. If there is no such item on the rig, then
all of the fields can be left blank.
If, however, any of the text fields contains an entry, the application will
assume that the item is going to be described and that all of the other text
fields should be mandatory. Once a description has been started, it must be
completed.

Movement between Data Entry Fields


The data entry cursor can be moved between the data entry fields within an
application either by positioning it with the mouse or by the use of the
following keys:
• Tab next field
• Shift +Tab previous field

Movement within a Data Entry Box


The cursor can be positioned within a data entry box either by moving the
mouse pointer to the required position and clicking, or by using the cursor
movement keys once the cursor is in the box.

Catalogs
Catalogs have been built into the system to simplify data entry. They
provide a simple description of a component which may encapsulate a
large body of technical detail.
Not all of the details may be displayed by the application which invoked
the catalog. However, when another application registers that a particular
catalog item has been selected, it may access further data about that item. If
the user has entered data manually, rather than through the use of a catalog,
the extra data will not be present in the second application.
The use of catalogs is recommended wherever possible.

1-10 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Introduction to DEAP

Catalogs will be maintained by the database administrator, who will add or


delete items when necessary. Items can be deleted without affecting
existing entries which call them.

Database Operations

Applying and Saving


Any change made to data must be saved if it is to become permanent. This
holds for additions, modifications and deletions.
Many DEAP activities involve building up sets of data and storing them in
the database. Subsets of the data are moved (applied) to a temporary
storage area while the complete data set is being built up.
When data entry is complete, the user must store the data permanently in
the database by saving it. If the data is not saved, it will be lost when the
application is closed.
Some windows in the DEAP system are provided with APPLY buttons and
some are provided with SAVE buttons — a few even contain both. APPLY
corresponds to the end of a phase of the data gathering process; SAVE
instructs the DEAP system to store all of the applied data in the database
where it may be accessed by other applications and other users.

Deleting
When the user has instructed the system to delete an item, the change in the
data set must be saved to the database. If it is not, the item will still be held
there and will re-appear when the data set is next used. In this instance, the
user may find it helpful to think in terms of saving changes in data to the
database rather than saving data to it.

Closing
If the CLOSE button is pressed before data has been saved to the database,
a warning dialogue box will always be displayed, informing the user that
changes have been made which will be lost if the user chooses to continue
with the CLOSE operation. The option to return to the application and save
the data will always be provided.

Exiting
The EXIT button should be used to leave an application and to return to the
application launcher. A message dialogue box will always be displayed to
confirm that the user does wish to exit the application.

Reference Guide 1-11


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Introduction to DEAP DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Units
Throughout the DEAP system the user will find that many numerical text
entry fields have a pop-up menu button displayed nearby, for specifying
units.

Figure 1-8
Typical Units Menu
Button

The pop-up menu is used to select between the default set of units available
for that text field. The units can be changed by dragging the mouse pointer
down the menu to the required unit system and releasing the button. Any
quantity which had been entered in the text field will be converted to its
corresponding value in the new units.
Since unit selection menus appear virtually everywhere in the system, they
will not be mentioned elsewhere in the manual, except in special cases.

Message Dialog Boxes


Some dialog boxes display messages to warn that an action will have an
effect on the data and to give the user choices about how to proceed:
CANCEL — close the dialog box and return the user to the window from
which the procedure started, without data loss or any change in settings.
OK — accept the current values or settings, then close the window.
CONTINUE — continue with the action described in the dialog box.
HELP — call up the DEAP help system.

CLOSE Message Box


When a user clicks on the CLOSE button from within an application but
has not yet applied or saved the data, a dialog box such as that illustrated
here will be displayed.

Figure 1-9
CLOSE
Dialog Box

1-12 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Introduction to DEAP

EXIT Dialog Box


When a user selects the EXIT button from within an application, the
dialogue box shown here will be displayed.

Figure 1-10
EXIT Dialog Box

DELETE Dialog Box


When the user has instructed the system to delete a significant part of a
data structure, the DELETE dialog box will appear, asking for
confirmation that the deletion should proceed.

Figure 1-11
DELETE Dialog
Box

Mandatory Fields Dialog Box


The system checks that mandatory fields have been completed, displaying
a dialog box with a warning if the user has clicked on SAVE or APPLY
without completing all of the mandatory fields. The system will display a
warning dialog box.

Figure 1-12
Mandatory
Fields Dialog
Box

The message displayed will indicate which field is incomplete. If more


than one data item has been omitted, the system will display the name of
the first item, progressing to the others as necessary when the user next
tries to APPLY from that window.
The default OK button will take the user back to the application screen, to
enter data in the appropriate field or fields and then select APPLY.

Reference Guide 1-13


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Introduction to DEAP DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Application Launcher
The DEAP application launcher is the starting point for all work in the
DEAP system.

Figure 1-13: Application Launcher Window

Logging in to the System

Figure 1-14
DEAP Login
Window

Before the user can open any applications, the launcher must be invoked
and supplied with the user’s name and password. DEAP will carry out
checks to see that the user has access rights to the system.
Once these checks have been passed, the system will refer to the database
to see which applications will be available to the user. The available
applications can then be selected from a pick list. While the applications
are being run, the launcher window will remain open.
For security reasons the password field will be obscured while the user’s
password is being entered.

1-14 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Introduction to DEAP

User Defaults
User defaults is a common window, accessible from the majority of
applications. The title bar will display the name of the application from
which this window was called.

Figure 1-15
User
Defaults

When the DEAP system is being used for the first time, the database will
be empty and no subjects will be available for selection as user defaults.
Subjects are described by using the well initialization application and then,
once they have been saved, they can be accessed via the user defaults
window. While it is not essential to enter all of the details, a subject’s
description must include a program.

User Default Data Fields


Each user has a personal set of defaults which are loaded at login. The
defaults specify an object of interest — usually a well — in terms of
COUNTRY, AREA (where appropriate), FIELD, FACILITY, WELL and
PROGRAM. Other settings include operational mode on or off, a system
printer and a system plotter.
The OFFSET WELL pick list button has been included to provide a “short-
cut” facility, allowing the user to move from one well to another which has
been allocated as its offset well without having to change the FIELD,
FACILITY and WELL fields individually. (See the chapter on Offset Well
Allocation for further background on this.)
Users who are in the process of planning or modeling a well may find this
useful, since it allows them to switch backwards and forwards from well to
well easily. Using this function, comparisons between costs and times of
wells can also be made easier.

Reference Guide 1-15


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Introduction to DEAP DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Setting User Defaults


The user defaults window enables the user to specify the defaults either for
the current session only or for all future sessions until the defaults are next
changed.
APPLY button — allows the user to make any changes to the default
settings valid for the current session only. This option might be used if the
user wanted to check on similar operations carried out on a well at a
different location to the current well, for example.
These defaults will only affect the current session and will automatically
reset to the original defaults on exit from the application.
SAVE — after pressing this button, a message box will be displayed
warning that the existing user defaults will be overwritten if the user
proceeds with the save operation (see below).

Figure 1-16
User Defaults
Warning
Dialog Box

The default settings apply immediately to the application from which the
user defaults window was invoked, and to all other applications as they are
opened.
If a user is running two applications at once, the default settings in one will
not be affected if the user changes the default settings in the other.

Note: Only users given sufficient access privileges by the


database administrator will be able to change the UNITS
setting on the user defaults window.

Time And Date Window


Settings for the year, the month, the day number, hours and minutes can be
adjusted via this window. When the time has been incremented past 23:59,
or decremented past 00:00, the day number will be adjusted accordingly, so
the user should re-check the day number setting before closing.
The up and down pairs of arrows at the left and right hand ends of the
TIME section adjust the hours and minutes settings respectively.

1-16 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Introduction to DEAP

The minute increment and decrement arrows change the time by 15


minutes with each click; if the user holds down the keyboard shift button
and clicks the minute arrows, the time will be changed by 1 minute with
each click.
Time can be entered directly by double clicking on the TIME text field and
entering values for hours and minutes, separated by a colon.

Figure 1-17
Date and
Time Window

Special Feature
NOW — adjusts all settings to the current system time and date.

File Operations
File operations include clearing an application of data,
loading existing files and saving data under a user-
specified file name.
In certain of the applications a file menu is available from
the file icon displayed above. This menu will contain either the following
options: NEW, OPEN, SAVE, SAVE AS…, DEAP, EXIT and in some
cases RECOVER also. Only a few applications support these operations.
For explanations of the UNIX directory structure and other filing
operations, the user is referred to the DBA. For explanations of the CASE
function available in DEAP, see the separate chapter on the CASE
mechanism.

Exiting from an Application offering Filing Options


Applications which offer filing options do not have simple EXIT buttons
on their main windows. Instead, the exit option is accessed via the file icon
pop-up menu.

Reference Guide 1-17


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Introduction to DEAP DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Using Data from the DEAP Database


Applications which provide the file icon menu allow the user to call from
the database the most recent set of operational data for the default well.
This may be found useful for running “what if” simulations.
The option to RECOVER is available on the cement placement simulator
menu. It enables the user to abandon any new simulation figures which
have been entered to the data as it was for the previous simulation.

Load, Save and Read From Data File Windows


The LOAD file and SAVE file and READ FROM DATA file windows
operate in a similar manner. The user’s first action is to select the directory
in which the file belongs; options enable the user to move up and down
through the directory structure.

Figure 1-18
Read from Data
File Window

If data is being loaded, the next step is to select a file from the directory.
When saving data, the user must either select an existing file in which to
save it or supply the name of the new file in which it is to be saved.
Four conventions are observed in DEAP file operations:
• A directory name followed by a single dot is the current directory.
• Selecting a directory name followed by two dots (e.g. /aaa/bbb/..) will
move the user up one level in the directory structure.

1-18 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Introduction to DEAP

• An entry selected from the directories column will become the current
directory and any files it contains will be displayed in the files column
• An asterisk (*) can replace any number of characters in a file name
during a search for a group of files.
For instance, j*.cmap would refer to all files in the current directory
whose names started with j and which carried the extension .cmap;
*.cmap would refer to all files in the current directory carrying the
extension .cmap; and * would refer to all files in the current directory.

Special Features
LOOK FOR FILES WHICH MATCH… — this text field normally
contains the name of the current directory, plus an asterisk followed by the
correct extension for data files associated with the current application.
The text field is editable so that the user can specify a pattern to which the
listed files must conform. When the user selects FILTER, the window will
display all of the files in the current directory which match the pattern.
SELECTION — normally displays the file name chosen from the
directories and files columns. However, the user can enter the full file
name (including the directory name) manually, if required.

Editing Hole And String Component Tables


Many applications in the DEAP system require the user to describe hole
geometry, drill strings, cementing strings or casing strings. The procedures
for entering data into specific tables are provided elsewhere. However, the
pop-up menus for inserting and deleting table entries are common to all
tables, so they are depicted here to avoid duplication.

Figure 1-19
Insertion and
Deletion Pop-up
Menus Edit menu
Delete
Insert Above Insert Riser
Insert Below Insert Casing
Insert Liner
Insert Hole

Reference Guide 1-19


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Introduction to DEAP DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Report Generator
The report generator provides a standard method of displaying reports
within all DEAP applications. Individual applications may contain report
selection windows when several different reports are available. These
windows, which invoke the report generator, are described in the sections
on the applications themselves.
The standard window, illustrated below, will appear each time the
REPORT… button is selected, when the report is in text format.

Figure 1-20
Report
Generator
Window

Reports which are in a graphical format, allowing the user to zoom in on


selected areas, etc, will be discussed shortly, and contain a number of
additional special features.

1-20 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Introduction to DEAP

Special Features
RERUN — recompiles the report using any new data and redisplays it.
PRINTER… — invokes the printer selection window and sends the report
to the selected printer.
FILE… — invokes the file handler window and saves the report on disc.
REFRESH — redisplays the report from the beginning.

Printer Selection
The printer selection window contains a list of all AVAILABLE
PRINTERS, a data entry field in which the required NUMBER OF
COPIES should be entered and another field displaying the name of the
printer which has currently been selected.
As a default, the SELECTION box will contain the name of the printer
which has been selected within the user defaults utility.

Figure 1-21
Printer
Selection

Reference Guide 1-21


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Introduction to DEAP DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Reports File Handler

Figure 1-22
Reports
File Handler

Graphical Report Viewer


Figure 1-23
Graphical
Report Viewer
– sample
Travelling
Cylinder
Diagram

1-22 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Introduction to DEAP

Special Features
RERUN — recompiles the report using any new data and redisplays it.
REFRESH — redisplays the report from the beginning.
BEST FIT — redisplays a plot at a scale that shows the whole page in the
available window.
TO SCALE — redisplays the plot to the scale defined for the drawing.
ZOOM — displays a segment of the plot, at the same aspect ratio, whose
area is defined by a series of mouse clicks.
HARDCOPY — invokes the hard copy selection window and sends the
report to the selected plotter.
FILE… — invokes the file handler window and saves the report to disk.

Hard Copy Selection


This window contains a box which lists all available plotters plus a set of
radio buttons that set the scale and location of the drawing on the plot
sheet. As a default, the name of the plotter which is highlighted will be the
one which has been selected within the user defaults utility.

Figure 1-24
Hard copy
Selection

Special Features
TO SCALE — the drawing will appear at a 1:1 scale, ignoring any paper
size limitations.
BEST FIT — the drawing will be scaled and rotated to make best use of the
paper defined for the selected plotting device.
CUSTOM — the ORIGIN fields will become available. The user may
specify the co-ordinates into which the plot should be fitted.

Reference Guide 1-23


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Introduction to DEAP DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

DEAP Currency Codes


The codes for the currencies supported by DEAP are as follows:

Currency Name Alphabetic Code Country

Canadian Dollar CAD Canada


Yuan Renminbi CNY China
Colombian Peso COP Colombia
CFA Franc BEAC XAF Senegal
Danish Krone DKK Denmark
Egyptian Pound EGP Egypt
French Franc FRF France
Deutsche Mark DEM Germany
Rupiah IDR Indonesia
Iranian Rial IRR Iran
Iraqi Dinar IQD Iraq
Italian Lira ITL Italy
Yen JPY Japan
Mexican Peso MXP Mexico
Netherlands Guilder NLG Netherlands
Naira NGN Nigeria
Norwegian Krone NOK Norway
Kina PGK Papua New Guinea
Saudi Riyal SAR Saudi Arabia
UAE Dirham AED UAE
Pound Sterling GBP United Kingdom
US Dollar USD USA
Bolivar VEB Bolivia
Dong VND Vietnam

1-24 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Introduction to DEAP

Hole Geometry And Well Geometry Definitions


To avoid confusion, the distinction DEAP makes between the geometry of
the hole and the geometry of the well itself should be made clear.
The terms “hole geometry” and “annular geometry” are used to describe
the internal walls of the innermost annular region formed by the riser,
casing, liner and hole sections in a well. The walls enclose the volume in
which drilling fluids circulate and in which assemblies are run. A
description of this region is required by many DEAP engineering
applications.

Figure 1-25 A
Hole (Annular) Riser
Geometry B

Conductor
C
D

Casing
E

F
G

Liner

I
J Liner

K
Open Hole
L

Annular geometry can be described using a combination of riser, casing,


liner and open hole sections. The shaded area in the illustration represents
the hole geometry seen while drilling out the shoe K of the deepest liner
section in a well.
The casing string BC can not be “seen,” nor can the casing and liner
lengths FG and HI and so these items do not form part of the hole
geometry. The same logic applies to the hole sections in which these casing
and liner strings are set but they are, however, still a part of the well
geometry.

Reference Guide 1-25


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Introduction to DEAP DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Target Vertex Location Conventions


Figure 1-26: Target Vertex Location Conventions

Target vertex locations are defined in terms of


their distances from the target centre and their Grid North
angles wrt highside in the target plane.
Highside
Dip azimuth = Down dip azimuth + 180°

Target plane
Dip azimuth
Plan
view

Target vertex
Vertex angle
w.r.t. highside

Target
centre Vertex
X distance

Side
view Horizontal

Dip angle
Target

Down dip Target


plane

1-26 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Introduction to DEAP

DEAP Geodetic Co-ordinate Conversions


The DEAP co-ordinate conversion system will calculate scale factor and
convergence for the transverse mercator and the two standard parallel
version (2SP) of the Lambert conic conformal geodetic projection types.
Between them, these two projection types cover most oil exploration and
production areas.
BPX uses the convention that grid convergence is measured positively
clockwise from the meridian, i.e:
Convergence = True Azimuth – Grid Bearing
The opposite sign convention (Convergence = Grid Bearing – True
Azimuth) is often used in the southern hemisphere.

Areas Covered by the Transverse Mercator and Lambert Conic


(2SP) Projections

Europe
Offshore — NW Europe continental shelf (all areas), Mediterranean sea.
Onshore — Austria, Britain, Denmark, Germany, Ireland, Italy, Norway,
Portugal, Spain, Yugoslavia, Eastern Europe (modern systems).

Africa
All of the continent except northern Algeria, Libya and Tunisia.

Asia
China, offshore Indonesia, Iran (modern systems), Iraq, Japan, Korea,
Oman, Philippines, Qatar, Saudi Arabia, Syria (modern systems), Turkey,
United Arab Emirates, CIS (all republics forming the former USSR),
Vietnam, Yemen.

Australasia
Australia, Papua New Guinea.

North America
Canada, Mexico, USA (except Alaskan Panhandle)

South America
All areas except Trinidad and some older Venezuelan fields.

Reference Guide 1-27


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Introduction to DEAP DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Areas Covered by Projections other than Transverse Mercator


and Lambert Conic
The following areas are not currently covered by DEAP mapping
projections:

Europe
Cyprus, onshore France (including Corsica), onshore Netherlands,
Switzerland.
Several European countries have older systems which have been or are
being replaced, usually with the transverse mercator projections. Older
systems may be encountered in Albania, Bulgaria, Czechoslovakia,
Greece, Hungary, Poland, Romania.

Africa
Algeria, Central African Republic, Chad, Libya, Madagascar, Morocco,
onshore Tunisia.

Asia
Afghanistan, Bangladesh, Burma, India, Israel, onshore East and West
Malaysia, Pakistan.
Several Asian countries have older systems which have been or are being
replaced, usually with the transverse mercator projections. Older systems
may be encountered in Cambodia, onshore Indonesia, Iran, Iraq, Jordan,
Kuwait, Lebanon, Syria.

Australasia
New Zealand — new system; the old system now being phased out is the
transverse mercator.

North America
Alaska Panhandle, Cuba, Jamaica.
Several North American countries have older systems which have been or
are being replaced, usually with transverse mercator projections. Older
systems may be encountered in Costa Rica, Dominican Republic,
Guadeloupe, Guatemala, Haiti, Honduras, Nicaragua, Panama.

1-28 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Introduction to DEAP

Safety And Good Engineering Practice


A number of the applications which are integral to the DEAP system may
be used in circumstances which could involve fatal injury or serious
financial loss.
Although great care has been taken to try to ensure the appropriateness and
correctness of the algorithms used, the computer software cannot be
guaranteed to be entirely free from error.
In more general terms the DEAP applications are part of a system
comprising software, hardware and operating procedures.
To minimize the risk of injury or serious financial loss, sound engineering
practice, involving training, experience and common sense should be
observed. Independent checks should be made where appropriate. If in
doubt the user should contact the expert nominated at the user’s site.
Any suggestions to improve the safe use of the system will be particularly
welcome.

BHA Nominalization
BHA nominalization is the process by which a detailed technical
description of an actual BHA is broken down into a geometrically simpler
form. The simplified version is then used in an application.
By using a nominalized BHA, application processing time may be reduced
significantly. In addition, the resulting description is consistent with the
format normally encountered in well planning.
The following elements are covered by the nominalization process
currently included in DEAP:
• Components for which there is no simulation capability are ignored
and a warning is issued.
• Components, e.g. TOTCO, which have no effect on the length or
shape of the BHA are ignored.
• No additional aggregation of components takes place.
• All DEAP BHA components are mapped to a set of application
specific components with associated dimensions and materials —
stabilizer positions are calculated to the blade centre, measured from
the bit (see below).

Reference Guide 1-29


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Introduction to DEAP DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

DEAP Component Nominalised Component


Drill Bits Ignored (see note 1)
Stabilisers Drill Collar (see note 2)
Drill Collars Drill Collar
MWD MWD/Motor
Jars Drill Collar
Motors/Turbines MWD/Motor
Subs Drill Collar
Core Barrels Drill Collar
Hole Opener/Under Reamer Drill Collar
Drill Pipe Drill Pipe
HWDP HWDP
Other Drillstring Components Drill Collar
Fishing Components Ignored
Tubing/Casing Casing
Totco Ignored

Note 1: Bit length is ignored but nozzle details are imported


independently to the bit details screen.

Note 2: Stabilizer positions are imported independently to the


drill string simulator.

1-30 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Introduction to DEAP

Example
17-1/2” BIT — 17-3/8” NBS — 9-1/2” NMSDC —
17-15/32” NMSS — 9-1/2” NMMWD — 17-15/32” NMSS —
2 x 9-1/2” NMDC — 17-15/32” NMSS — 3 x 9-1/2” DC —
9-1/2” XO — 8” DC — 8” JAR — 3 x 8” DC — 8” XO —
12 6-5/8” HWDP — 8” DART SUB

DEAP Component: Nominalised Component:


17-1/2” BIT Ignored

17-3/8” NBS 9-1/2” Drill Collar

9-1/2” NMSDC 9-1/2” Drill Collar

17-15/32” NMSS 9-1/2” Drill Collar

9-1/2” NMMWD 9-1/2” MWD

17-15/32” NMSS 9-1/2” Drill Collar

9-1/2” NMSDC 9-1/2” Drill Collar

17-15/32 NMSS 9-1/2” Drill Collar

3 x 9-1/2” DC 3 x 9-1/2” Drill Collars

9-1/2” XO 9-1/2” Drill Collar

8” DC 8” Drill Collar

8” JAR 8” Drill Collar

3 x 8” DC 3 x 8” Drill Collars

8” XO 8” Drill Collar

12 x 6-5/8” HWDP 12 x 6-5/8” HWDP

8” DART SUB 8” Drill Collar

Stabilizer positions would be quoted as 5–24–63–131 in feet.

Reference Guide 1-31


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Introduction to DEAP DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Glossary
AFE
Authorization For Expenditure.
API
American Petroleum Institute.
Application
A computer program dealing with one specific aspect of drilling
engineering — an application may contain several sub-applications.
Application Launcher
A part of DEAP allowing access to the applications which the user
is entitled to see.
BHA
Bottom Hole Assembly.
BUR
Build Up Rate.
Cascading Menu
A table of options appearing as a result of choosing an option from
an earlier menu — a second level to the menu structure.
Catalog
A table of data entries appropriate to the current text entry field —
catalogs are used to speed up data entry.
Common Windows
A group of windows which are accessible from several places in the
DEAP system — for example, user defaults.
Concept
An approach to exploiting an object of interest.
Database
Storage area for drilling engineering data and system parameters of
all kinds.
DDSS
Directional Drilling Support System — a suite of DEAP
applications concerned mainly with the analysis of survey data for
use in directional drilling.
DEAP
Drilling Engineering Applications Platform.

1-32 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Introduction to DEAP

Design
The engineering requirements necessary to develop a concept.
DSC
Directional Survey Calculator or Drill String Configuration.
ECD
Equivalent Circulating Density.
Event
An occurrence which alters (suspends, completes, aborts) the
current operation, e.g. at BHA, observed well static, had equipment
failure, at setting depth, stopped due to weather.

It will by its nature define an observation made, the assumed reason


and/or response. Typically several events are incorporated within
an operation.
Facility
Structure(s) permanently attached to an object of interest for the
purpose of exploitation.
FRP
Facility Reference Point.
HWDP
Heavy Weight Drill Pipe.
Icon
A small, easily understood diagram that takes the place of
explanatory text, or a small graphical image representing an
application which has been minimized.
ID
Inside Diameter.
Inc.
Inclination.
IS
Inventory System.
Job
A set of activities (tasks and operations) which are carried out as a
standard piece of work (e.g. drill hole, open hole, core hole, log
hole, etc) to achieve an objective.

Typically several jobs are incorporated within a phase and several


tasks within a job.

Reference Guide 1-33


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Introduction to DEAP DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

KOP
Kick Off Point.
MD
Measured Depth.
MSL
Mean Sea Level.
MWD
Measurement While Drilling.
NPD
Norwegian Petroleum Directorate.
Object of interest
An asset area with geodetic boundaries and sub-surface targets.
OD
Outside Diameter.
Operation
An activity or set of activities which are carried out to achieve an
objective, e.g. pull BHA, run tubulars, flow check, circulate, wash.

Typically several operations are incorporated within a task and


several events within an operation.
Phase
A set of activities which are carried out to achieve an objective. A
phase provides a gross view of activities required. A phase may
apply at facility, rig or well level.

Typically several phases are incorporated within a program and


several jobs within a phase.
Pick list
A table of data entries appropriate to the current text entry field. —
pick lists are used to speed up data entry.
Pop-up Menu
A menu of optional actions or settings.
Program
The schedule of procedures required to implement designs
necessary to develop a concept. This will normally consist of a
combination of phases of development associated with the subjects
required.

1-34 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Introduction to DEAP

Progress Log
The strictly sequential record of activities associated with a subject.
Log activities may be suspended and restarted a number of times
during the life of a subject.
Qualifier
A set of attributes specific to a chosen activity.
Report Interval
The interval selected for validation and distribution of reports. A
report period will have a start time (e.g. 0600) which will be set on
a company wide basis.
Rig
The derrick, drawworks and associated surface equipment of a
drilling or workover unit.
ROP
Rate of Penetration.
SCR
Slow Circulating Rate.
Scroll Bar
An analogue method of moving through a window to see areas
beyond its boundaries — based on a sliding volume control. The
scroll bar indicates how much of the window is visible, and the
location of the visible part within the whole window.
Slider Bar
An analogue method of entering quantitative data — based on a
sliding volume control. The figure above the slider indicates the
value to which it is set.
SPM
Strokes per Minute.
Sub-application
A sub-section of an application. An application may contain two or
more sub-applications to make data entry easier and more logical or
to provide a calculator function for occasional stand-alone use.
Subject
The well program, encompassing well, rig and facility, for which
phase, job, task, operation or event data will be collected.

Reference Guide 1-35


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Introduction to DEAP DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Task
A set of activities which are carried out to achieve an objective, e.g.
anchor rig, BHA run, run tubulars, subsea survey, repair.

Typically several tasks are incorporated within a job and several


operations within a task.
TFA
Total Flow Area.
TVD
True Vertical Depth.
User Defaults
A set of user-defined values and settings which will appear
automatically in applications, where appropriate, until other values
are entered by the user.
WOB
Weight On Bit.
WRP
Well Reference Point.

1-36 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Chapter 2

Default Unit Conversion

Figure 2-1
Default Unit
Conversion

The DEAP system performs calculations in SI units, but


offers the user the option of specifying the units in which
data is to be entered. The units to be used for each
dimension — length, width, density, mass, etc. — are
specified via the default unit conversion application (DUC).
A default unit conversion (DUC) set is allocated to each
privileged DEAP system user. Initially, the user will be
given the group conversion set — the site’s standard set of
units. This application enables the user to alter the set to suit
personal preferences, either by editing it or by overwriting it
with another set and then modifying it as required.

Reference Guide 2-1


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Default Unit Conversion DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Overview
All unit conversions are of the form: VALUE = (mSI + c)n
and are taken from the API and SPE conversion tables and the international
SI users’ conversion tables. Once a dimension’s units have been specified
via the application, the same units will be used throughout the user’s view
of the DEAP system.
Any DUC set can be copied, but users can only modify their own sets. For
data security reasons all users can view other users’ DUC sets, but cannot
change them. Each set contains records relating to the dimension the user
will encounter while using the DEAP system. A record consists of:
1. A DIMENSION — plus some dimension description text
2. A UNIT — plus some unit description text
3. A conversion algorithm, defining how a quantity is converted
from one unit system to another
4. A DECIMAL text field, specifying the number of decimal places
which should be displayed for the unit
5. A WIDTH text field, specifying the total number of characters,
including the decimal point, which should be displayed in the
text field
6. The SAVE AS text field will contain the user’s name when the
window opens. Because each user is only permitted to have one
set, this text field is not editable.

Setting Default Unit Conversions


If a privileged user does not have a DUC set, one will be created when the
SAVE button is pressed. Thereafter, when it is to be modified, the user will
select the name of the set from the SET NAME picklist.
A single SAVE will cause all modified DUC records to be copied into the
user’s set on the database. It is not necessary to save them individually.

Special Feature
PRINT — sends the current DUC set to the printer.

2-2 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Chapter 3

Rig Initialization

Rig initialization supplies data to several other parts of the


DEAP system to reduce the amount requested from the user.
The planning system uses the data when setting up drilling
programs, and daily operations and post well review
applications use it when comparing planned and actual
performances.

Reference Guide 3-1


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Rig Initialization DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Overview
The rig description generated in the rig initialization application comprises
seven categories of data:
• Rig equipment
• Rotary equipment
• Mud equipment
• Bulk storage details (pit capacities)
• Pump equipment
• Well control details
• Rig stability details

Navigation
Navigation in this application is straightforward because each of the sub-
applications is called from the main window.

Main
Window Report

Rig Rotary Mud Pump Bulk * Well Rig


Equipment Equipment Equipment Equipment Storage Control Stability

It is possible to have the main window and all of the sub-applications open
at the same time, if necessary. If the user selects another rig from user
defaults while any of the sub-application windows are open, the windows
will be updated automatically.

Application Main Window


The main window offers options for renaming rigs, creating new rig entries
and deleting existing ones. It also gives access to each of the sub-
applications and to the report generating facility.

3-2 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Rig Initialization

The UPDATED BY and ON fields are updated automatically as soon as


the user saves new or modified data to the database.

Figure 3-1
Main Window

Special features
REPORT… — invokes the DEAP report generator.
CREATE RIG… — invokes the create rig window.

Figure 3-2
Create Rig

RENAME RIG… — invokes the rename rig window.

Figure 3-3
Rename Rig

Reference Guide 3-3


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Rig Initialization DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Rig Equipment
The rig equipment window is sub-divided into four sections:
DERRICK, DRAWWORKS, KELLY and SURFACE PIPE /
STAND PIPE / KELLY HOSE.

Figure 3-4
Rig
Equipment

To take account of occasions when one of these major components is not


present, each of the sections can be completed individually. However, the
system can only accept a complete description of each section; all of the
details must be supplied, or the section must be left empty.
If data entry for more than one section is being completed, a single SAVE
is sufficient to store all of the new or modified data in the database.

Special Feature
CLEAR — invokes a pop-up menu from which the user may select to clear
only details of DERRICK, DRAWWORKS, KELLY or PIPEHOSE
independently of the others.

Rotary Equipment
The rotary equipment window is sub-divided into two sections:
TOP DRIVE and ROTARY TABLE. To take account of
occasions when one of these major components is not present, either
section can be completed on its own.

3-4 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Rig Initialization

However, the system can only accept a complete description of each


section; all of the details must be supplied, or the section must be left
empty. If both sections are being completed, a single SAVE is sufficient to
store all of the new or modified data in the database.

Figure 3-5
Rotary
Equipment

Special Feature
CLEAR — invokes a pop-up menu from which allows the user to clear
details of TOP DRIVE or ROTARY TABLE independently of the other.

Mud Equipment
The mud equipment sub-application is used to build up a list of
the various items of mud handling equipment on the rig.
Equipment is grouped according to type.

Figure 3-6
Mud
Equipment

Special Feature
DELETE — deletes the selected mud equipment entry.

Reference Guide 3-5


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Rig Initialization DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Pump Equipment
The pump equipment window enables the user to examine, edit
and enter pump equipment details. While the details usually
come from a catalog, the user has the option of entering or altering them
manually; the procedures given here assume the use of the catalog system,
which is recommended wherever possible.
When adding pumps or modifying pump details, a single SAVE will
instruct the system to store all of the new data.
Pumps are divided into mud and cement categories. After selecting the
appropriate category, the user can enter details of new pumps or review
pump details that have been entered already.

Figure 3-7
Pump
Equipment

Special feature
DELETE — deletes the currently selected pump.

Altering a Pump Number


If a pump number has been entered incorrectly, it is usually possible to
enter the correct number and re-save the data. However, the system will not
permit two pumps to have the same number.
So if two pumps, say A and B, have had their numbers transposed, the user
must change pump A’s number to an unused number; correct pump B’s
number and then correct pump A’s number.

3-6 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Rig Initialization

Bulk Storage
The bulk storage window holds details of the storage capacities
of named mud pits with a status of either ACTIVE, RESERVE or
OTHER.

Figure 3-8
Bulk Storage

Well Control
The well control window is divided into four sections: CHOKE
LINE, KILL LINE, BOP and DIVERTER LINES.

Figure 3-9
Well Control

Reference Guide 3-7


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Rig Initialization DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

The sections can be completed independently of each other. However, the


system can only accept a complete description of an item — if the user
enters choke line diameter, choke line pressure must also be entered,
similarly with kill line diameter and kill line pressure, and BOP size,
pressure and temperature — all of the details must be supplied, or the
section must be left empty.
Any description of the diverter lines must include manufacturer, model,
internal diameter, pressure and line length; closing speed is optional.

Special feature
CLEAR — invokes a pop-up menu from which the user may select to clear
only details of CHOKE LINE, KILL LINE, BOP or DIVERTER LINE
independently of the others.

Rig Stability
The rig stability window is used to enter and examine details of
the rig’s deck load limits, its operating, survival and transit
drafts, its thrusters and its deck load limits. Depending on the type of rig
selected, some of the text fields become mandatory; the mandatory fields
are indicated in the procedure.

Figure 3-10
Rig Stability

Special feature
CLEAR — invokes a pop-up menu from which the user may clear details
of DECK LOAD LIMITS or THRUSTERS independently of the other.

3-8 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Rig Initialization

Report
Figure 3-11 Rig initialization Report

Reference Guide 3-9


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Rig Initialization DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

•Notes•

3-10 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Chapter 4

Well Initialization

This application provides the foundation upon which most


of the other DEAP applications rest. In the well
initialization data entry windows, the user defines the
relationships among fields, targets, facilities, slots, wells,
rigs and drilling programs in a strict hierarchical order.
After the new or modified data is stored in the DEAP
database, users of other applications will be able to access
relevant parts of it through the user defaults window. For
DEAP v3.0, the sidetrack functionality is fully operational.

Reference Guide 4-1


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Well Initialization DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Overview
The relationships among fields, targets, facilities, slots, wells, rigs and
drilling programs must be built up in a strictly hierarchical order during
well initialization, with no gaps in the hierarchy. It is impossible to allocate
a well to a facility without first allocating the facility to a field. A target
cannot be allocated to a well before the well is allocated to a facility.
When building a completely new set of relationships, the user is obliged to
follow the five steps outlined here in strict order.
1. First: define the field, its name and the blocks which it
comprises; the field’s description is completed by selecting the
mapping projection and the geodetic datum. If necessary, the
user can create a completely new field. All of this work takes
place in the field details window.
2. Second: build up a list of all of the targets in the field, together
with their locations and their boundaries. Data entry for this stage
takes place in the target location details and geological target
boundaries windows.
3. Third: begin the description of the facility by specifying its name
and type, its location and slot details. Data entry takes place in
the facility details, facility location and slot details windows. The
slot details window will be modified to suit single or multi-well
initialization.
4. Fourth: create wells and assign them to slots. Each new well
must also be given lists of fields and targets with which the
system is to associate it. These activities take place in the well
details window.
5. Fifth: specify the rig which is to carry out the drilling program
and the drilling datum details for the selected rig in the allocate
rigs and programs and drilling datum details windows.
When the hierarchy has been saved and is being modified or extended,
users are able to go straight to where the changes are needed. If a change is
made at a high level in the hierarchy, e.g. a facility or a field, the
application will update the other screens as far as is possible without
ambiguity.
For instance, if the user selects a different facility in the facility details
window, the application will be able to update the facility, field and slot
details windows, but will grey out the allocate rigs and programs and
drilling datum windows because a well must be selected before those
windows can be completed.

4-2 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Well Initialization

Technical Description
This application is used to define well details before drilling starts. It is
possible to update the information subsequently if there are any changes
while drilling (target location, for example). Special attention is given to
single wells to simplify the inputs.

Mapping Projection and Co-ordinate Conversions


The mapping projection and geodetic datum parameters used in well
initialization must match those used for the geologists’ surveys.
Projection and co-ordinate conversions are handled by the Geodetic Data
Transformation Package (GDT) v3, which was developed by BPX as a
comprehensive tool for the translation of mapping projections.
See the Introduction to DEAP for more details.

Field Details
The user can define and edit the location and the development status of a
field. Location details include country, area and block, together with the
mapping projection in use and the geodetic datum parameters. Fields may
extend over block boundaries.

Facility and Well Reference Point Definitions


The definitions cover country, area and block and the rig’s planned or
actual position, specified by either geographical or projection co-ordinates,
the facility’s name and type and the local water depth if appropriate.
Slots are described by their displacement and rotation with respect to the
facility reference point at both the drilling datum and at the well reference
point.
• At the drilling datum, slots are described by their U and V co-
ordinates, inclination, azimuth and gyro foresight bearing with
reference to survey reference north.
• At the well reference point, slots are described by their U and V co-
ordinates, distance from MSL, inclination and azimuth.

Target Details
The target details sub-application handles geographic mapping and target
allocations for single and multi-well developments. It also maintains well
details required by regulatory bodies. A range of well information reports
is available, either on screen or as hard copy.

Reference Guide 4-3


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Well Initialization DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

One or more targets for each well can be defined and edited. The center of
each target is defined as a point on a plane. The user specifies the point’s
location, its depth with respect to mean sea level, the plane’s angles of dip
and dip azimuth, and the name of the target formation.
Target boundaries can be defined in either of two ways.
• For an approximately circular target, they are defined as being on a
circle of a given radius, centered on the point and parallel to the plane.
• A target with a more complex shape, due perhaps to faults or block
boundaries, is described as an irregular polygon on the plane. The user
specifies the range and the bearing from the point of up to 16 polygon
vertices.

Referencing System
There are several possible reference points for well vertical depths; strata
from geologists’ data will be given as TVDSS, while drilled depths will be
given as TVD BRT (or RKB).

Figure 4-1
Referencing
in DEAP

AB C
MSL A A
SEA
C B

A. Mean sea level (MSL) to drilling datum


B. Well reference point (WRP)to drilling datum
C. Water depth

So that a common reference may be used, well initialization refers all


vertical depths to MSL, which is itself referred to a particular spheroid
datum.
Similarly, for measured depths, points are referred to the WRP. As this is
the absolute reference for a well, it must be chosen carefully. It is usually
the mudline or the ground level co-ordinates of the well.
The wellhead should not be used, as its position might change — during a
workover, for instance.

4-4 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Well Initialization

The FRP (facility reference point) is used to define well positions on the
earth’s surface prior to spud in. So it should be readily accessible and
immobile for the lifetime of the facility. Other parts of the facility are
defined by offsets from the FRP, using local northings and eastings.

Co-ordinate Conversion System


Slot bays are plotted on a local grid with U and V co-ordinates, arbitrarily
chosen to fit on paper for planning purposes. The co-ordinates are
converted by a rotation and a translation into local northings and eastings
to relate them to the FRP.

Figure 4-2 U
Co-ordinate 8
Conversion

}
1 2 3
System
Original Slot
}4 V
Plan
6 5 4

Example
On a platform installation, slot 3 is at (4,8) when viewed on the engineering
drawing, using (U,V) co-ordinates (this example is shown in feet). The slot
bay heading, θ1, is 315 degrees. The slot plan origin to FRP distance is
128.06 ft. The slot plan origin to FRP rotation, θ2, is 172 degrees.

Figure 4-3 N
Co-ordinate Slot
Conversion Bay
System Heading, θ1
Slot Plan θ1=315°
Drawing
E
θ2=172°

128.06ft
FRP

Reference Guide 4-5


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Well Initialization DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Slot Plan Conversion


To convert the slot plan origin to FRP distance and rotation to the
translation (∆N, ∆E) from FRP to slot plan origin.

Figure 4-4
Co-ordinate
Conversion θ1=172° N
System
Slot Plan θ1=315°
Conversion

128.06 ft ∆N

FRP
E
∆E
∆N = FRP distance x cos (slot bay heading, q1, + FRP rotation, q2 – 180 deg)
∆E = FRP distance x sin (slot bay heading, q1 + FRP rotation, q2 – 180 deg)

To convert the (U,V) co-ordinates to local northings and eastings, the


application performs the following calculations:
N = U cos (slot bay heading, θ1) - V sin (slot bay heading, θ2) + ∆N
E = U sin (slot bay heading, θ1) + V cos (slot bay heading, θ2) + ∆E
So, the local northings and eastings for slot 3 are:
∆N = 128.06 cos (315 + 172 –180)
= 77.068 ft
∆E = 128.06 sin (315 + 172 –180)
= – 102.273 ft
N = 4 cos 315 – 8 sin 315 + 77.068
= 85.553
E = 4 sin 315 + 8 cos 315 – 102.273
= – 99.445 ft

Impact of Slot Reference Point Definitions


The drilling datum slot reference point defines the slot positions at the
drilling datum (usually rotary table or RKB), using U and V co-ordinates.
The co-ordinates are referred to the FRP by a rotation and a translation.
The drilling datum relates the orientation and position of a well to the
drilling rig. This means that well data is independent of the rig that drilled
or worked over the well.

4-6 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Well Initialization

By defining a slot at the drilling datum and the well reference point, the
application can handle slant rigs and wells with curved conductors.

MD from DD to WRP ≠ TVD


Figure 4-6 Slot details @ DD ≠ Slot details @ WRP
Slant Rig
Drilling Datum

MSL

Plan View TVD

MD

Well Reference Point

Inclination @ WRP=
Inclination @ DD
Slot at Drilling Datum

Slot at Well Reference Point

Figure 4-5
PLAN VIEW
Curved
Conductors
Slots at Drilling Datum

Drilling Datum
Inclination at Drilling Datum = 0

MSL

TVD

Slots at WRP

Well Reference Point


Inclination at Slot Well Reference Point

Reference Guide 4-7


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Well Initialization DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Offsets
Offsets are specified by assuming that the observer is standing at the first
mentioned point, looking towards the second. They are positive in the
North, East and downward directions and angles are measured clockwise
from reference North.
Offsets will often be negative. For instance, the well reference point to
drilling datum offset will have a negative value if the WRP is the mudline
and the drilling datum is the rotary table.

Figure 4-7 N
Sign N
Conventions

V
N, E and Downwards are positive

SEA

Drill Datum to MSL is negative

Isolated wells are treated as single slot facilities on which the FRP may
coincide with the WRP. Defaults are provided by the application to
simplify data input.

Associated fields
The well details window in this application offers the option of building a
list of fields which are to be associated with the current well.
Fields may be associated either because they provide allocated or potential
targets for the well, or because they contain wells which may interfere with
the current well and which must be included in anti-collision scans.
The well initialization application caters for wells with more than one
target by enabling users to select a number of targets from the list of
associated fields.

4-8 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Well Initialization

Targets can be allocated at three different levels: to a facility, to a slot and a


facility, or to a well, a slot and a facility. The first two situations are
normally encountered during prospect development planning. The
accompanying illustrations show the various possible field, facility and
well combinations.

Figure 4-8 Facility 1 Facility 2


Example 1:
Simple Well
Allocation

Field A
(c) (e)

(d)
(a) (b)

In example 1, facility 1 is drilling wells to targets (a) and (b). Target (c) has
been allocated to a slot on facility 1, but not to a well. Target (d) is
unallocated. Target (e) has been allocated to a slot on facility 2. This is a
typical multi-site development, where the well trajectory has not yet been
planned to reach target (c), although the slot/target allocation is complete
for facility 1.

Figure 4-9 Facility 1 Facility 2


Example 2:
Field
Association

Field B
(k)
(j)
(h) (i)
Field A
(d) (g)
(c)
(b) (e) (f)
(a)

The second example represents the case in which a deeper reservoir is


discovered beneath an established field and a second facility has been
added to recover the reserves. Facility 1 is drilling wells to targets (a), (b),
and (c) in field A. Targets (d) and (e) are unallocated. Facility 2 is drilling
wells to targets (f) and (g) in field A via targets (h) and (i) respectively. So
field A must be associated with wells (h) and (i).

Reference Guide 4-9


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Well Initialization DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Sidetrack Initialization
The sidetrack initialization module is common to both the well
initialization application and the directional drilling support system and
may be invoked from both.
It is primarily used by the Senior Engineer, the Directional Specialist and
the Project Engineer, to initialize sidetracks around fish and abandoned
sections of hole and to initialize new wells created by a sidetrack if
requested by the client. Occasionally, the Drilling Engineer, the Drilling
Foreman and the Directional Engineer may also use the application.
The main functions of the sidetrack initialization module are as follows:
• Define or re-define a sidetrack well’s kick off point
• Assign a unique name to the sidetrack
• Start a new report interval for the sidetrack
• Associate all of the relevant parent well data with the sidetrack
(casing, cement, hole and survey program data)
• Allocate a rig to the sidetrack
• Remove unwanted planned sidetracks
• Return all relevant information to the calling application
A user’s right of access to the application will be checked when it is called.
This means that access to well planning or well initialization does not
guarantee access to sidetrack initialization.
In the DEAP system, a sidetrack well has the following attributes:
• It is kicked off from an existing well
• It can provide kick off points for further sidetracks
• It is “planned”, and as such can be deleted until the point at which it is
included in a report

Sidetrack Initialization in DEAP v3.0


While all of the above remains true of DEAP v3.0, considerable
modifications have been undertaken in order to fully enable the sidetrack
functionality, support the new data exchange mechanisms in DEAP v3.0,
and to ensure compatibility between the enhanced well initialization
application and all the other DEAP applications, whose functionality is
entirely based on the data entered and saved here.

4-10 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Well Initialization

In order that users of the earlier versions of DEAP may fully comprehend
the range and impact of the enhancements, the following general
considerations and explanations were included in this document.

General Considerations
Typically, when a well is sidetracked, one of two scenarios can occur.
• The sidetrack retains the name of the current well.
This usually occurs with short mechanical sidetracks. The abandoned
section of hole may be of considerable length and so must be taken
into account in anti-collision checks for any subsequent work in the
area. However the DDSS only handles one definitive survey per well.
The sidetrack is normally considered to be part of the work program
for the current well.
• The sidetrack acquires a new well name.
This usually occurs as a means of reaching an alternative objective, as
the original one was not as expected. Because the abandoned hole
section and sidetrack are identified as different wells, they have
separate wellbores, and so are both considered in anti collision
checks.
The new well has its own program associated with it. In earlier
versions of DEAP, this produced an artificial break in the tracking of
activities and the creation of multiple time recording and reporting
periods for what could be a continuous work program. The morning
drilling report, mud report, mud costs report, bit/BHA numbering and
costs reports all began again at zero.
In DEAP, time/depth curves and cost/depth curves are plotted for a
single program of work. Where a well is comprised of a number of
sidetracks all aimed at the original target, there was previously no
means of producing a composite time/depth plot.

Program of Work
Within DEAP’s activity model, a facility is comprised of a number of slots.
Each slot has one or more wells associated with it. A program of work is
defined for a single well and has a start and end date.
Reaching a target may be considered a program of work. In order to reach a
target one or more sidetracks may be used each with a unique wellbore.
The wellbores may be for the same well. Alternatively, the wellbore for a
sidetrack may have a different well name from the wellbore it was
sidetracked from. In either case the wellbores defined to reach a target will
be considered a single program of work.

Reference Guide 4-11


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Well Initialization DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

When a sidetrack is initiated within a work program a program interval is


created. This allows activities within a program to be associated with an
individual wellbore. The activities required for the construction of an
individual wellbore or for the whole well can thus be analyzed.

Required Updates to DEAP v3.0


So that DEAP v3.0 might be able to address the requirements generated by
these general considerations, and given the activity model already built into
the DEAP structure, the following modifications have been carried out:
• A wellbore is defined for an initial well and each associated sidetrack.
• Each wellbore has a definitive survey associated with it.
• A program of work is defined for one or more wellbores. Each
wellbore may have a different well name associated with it but will be
for the same slot.
• The unit of work for each wellbore within a program is defined as a
program interval with a start and end date.
• A wellbore has zero, one or more kick offs associated with it. A kick
off defines the wellbore a sidetrack is initiated from, the kick of point
(MD), kick off date/time and the wellbore the sidetrack initiated.

Enhancements Resulting From the v3.0 Updates to DEAP


As a result of implementing the above changes, the items listed below are
now possible:
• Activities, costs, equipment usage etc. can be tracked through a
program of work irrespective of how many well names are associated
with the program.
• A definitive survey can be maintained for a section of well that has
been abandoned, following a sidetrack where the well name has not
been changed.
• For any wellbore, reports may be generated that show a full data set
from surface to TD. The reports will encompass the structure of the
wellbore and the activities responsible for its construction. The reports
will include casing, cementation, geological make up of the wellbore,
activity sequence.
• All rigs associated with the construction of a wellbore will be
maintained. The time, depth and data offset for each visit of a rig to
the well will be maintained.
• The ability to scan all wellbores drilled from a slot where the
wellbores are for the same or different well name.

4-12 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Well Initialization

• Where a well is composed of many mechanical sidetracks all aimed at


the original target, a composite time/costs vs. depth curve can be
produced.
• The wellbore can be classified - respud, sidetrack, extension etc.

Navigation of Wellbores TD to Surface in DEAP v3.0


The data model has been changed to facilitate the easy navigation from any
given point on a wellpath to surface. The current “target wellpath” is
defined by assuming the route to target is the last kick off point for the well
and is used as the starting point to traverse the wellbores to surface.
A combination of the kick off depths and program intervals for each
wellbore is used to identify all activities associated with the wellpath.

Slot A has program of work P


which contains program intervals

Slot A
A

C
P1 P1, P2, P3, P4.
P2

B E
P4
P3
G D
F

Drilling activities create the following wellbores: A - B (Well X)


A - D (Well X)
A - F (Well X)
A - G (Well Y)

Well Data Set Migration in DEAP v3.0


All well data sets within the DEAP database will require some user
analysis to identify which wells drilled from a slot should have their
programs merged. The migration path will be carried out with a view to
giving the user the immediate gains from activity analysis and report
collation.

Reference Guide 4-13


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Well Initialization DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Impact of the v3.0 Update on Other Applications


There are a number of changes to the existing applications within DEAP as
well as a migration of existing well data sets to allow for the new model
changes.
• Program Initialization application
A program of work will be created/maintained associated with a slot.
The module will allow for the creation of program intervals, each with
a start and end date which, which will be associated with a wellbore.
• Progress Log application
Progress logs will remain linked to a program. The well name display
field will change if the well name changes during a program. The well
name displayed will be the well name in use at the end of the reporting
interval.
• Daily Reports applications
Daily Reports will remain linked to a program. The well name field
will change if the well name changes during a program.
• Phase Job Allocation application
PJA will remain carried out for a program. As in Progress Logs the
well name display field will change if the well name changes during a
program.
• Performance Enquiry Tool
Reaching a defined target is achieved using a single work program.
This may be carried out using more than one well name. The process
of analysis will now allow for the activity summary for reaching the
required target to be achieved.
• Directional Drilling Support System (DDSS)
The DDSS will record a definitive survey for each well path. The anti-
collision scanning module will be able to interpret the wellpaths for
all wellbores within a given area.

4-14 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Well Initialization

Navigation
Navigation for Existing Subjects
Main
Window

Field
Details

Target Facility Well Allocate Sidetrack


Location Details Details Rigs and Initialization
Details Programs

Create
Slot Target and Sidetrack
Geological Well Allocation
Details Report Drilling
Target Datum Datum
Boundary Details Details

Report: Report: Facility Rigs Allocated Reports


All Single Details to Program Menu
Targets Target Report Report

Facility Magnetic Slot details Target Location


Location Declination (single well, or Report
multi-well) at
WRP and Facility Details
Drilling Datum Report
Magnetic
Declination
Report Slot Details at WRP

Slot Details at
WRP Report and Slot Details at
Slot Details at Drilling Datum
Drilling Datum
Report Well Details
Report

Allocated Rigs
Report

After a program has been saved to the database and can be selected via user
defaults, users are free to move between the windows by any of the routes
shown below, entering data in whatever order is most convenient.
It is not necessary to close each window before moving to the next one in
the hierarchy, indeed it may often be helpful to leave preceding windows
open for reference while data is being entered.

Reference Guide 4-15


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Well Initialization DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

The report generator can be accessed from the main window and from
many of the sub-applications. Some reports are only available from the
sub-application windows.

Navigation for New and Incomplete Subjects


When a new subject is being described, it is essential to follow the correct
sequence of data entry. This is because each new piece of data must relate
properly to the structure that has been built up already. For instance, it
would not be permissible to describe a well without first defining the field,
target and facility to which it belongs.
The completed data structure can be very complex, so it is most important
that the user enters data very carefully — particularly in the allocate rigs
and programs window, where data cannot be altered after entry.

Main
Window

1 9 Allocate
Field
Details Rigs and
Programs

2 4 Facility 8 Well 10
Target Drilling
Location Details Details Datum
Details Details

3 Geological 7 Slot details (single


5 6 well, or multi-well)
Target Facility Magnetic at WRP and
Boundary Location Declination Drilling Datum

Correct Sequence
For a completely new field, facility, etc, the order in which the windows
should be addressed is:
• Field details — to define the field’s general location and the blocks in
which it lies
• Target location details — to specify the names and locations of the
targets in the field
• Geological target boundary — to specify the boundary and orientation
of each target
• Facility details — to specify the block in which the facility lies, its
name, its type and any associated fields

4-16 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Well Initialization

• Facility location — to specify the precise location of the facility, its


geodetic datum and mapping projection, water depth and reference
point description
• Slot details — to specify each slot’s location and orientation with
respect to the well reference point and the drilling datum
• Well details — to specify a slot, associated fields and one or more
targets for each well
• Allocate rigs and programs — to allocate a rig to the well’s program
The geological target boundary, facility location, slot details and drilling
datum windows must be completed as the user moves through the
application. They should be regarded as mandatory continuations of their
parent windows.

Special Notes
The user is free to end a description at any point, saving the data entered
already and returning to the main window before closing the application.
It is not necessary to close each window before moving to the next one in
the hierarchy, indeed it may often be helpful to leave preceding windows
open for reference while data is being entered.
It is not necessary to complete data entry in one session, as long as the data
is saved before the session ends. In the next session, the user can go
straight to the window where work was concluded in the previous session,
re-select the subject and carry on from there. The subject can be selected
from the user defaults window if the user had progressed as far as defining
a new program before saving and leaving.
If an incomplete description has been saved to the database at the end of an
editing session, the user will not be able to select it via user defaults. In this
case, the user must proceed along the chain of windows, re-selecting the
previous settings, until the configuration is the same as it was at the end of
the earlier editing session.

Application Main Window


The main window provides access to the main data entry windows and to
the report menu. When the relationships between the various data items are
being described for the first time, the user would normally move from one
window to the next in the sequence, without returning to the main window.
When the relationships are being edited or extended, however, the user is
free to jump directly to the appropriate window from the main window.

Reference Guide 4-17


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Well Initialization DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Figure 4-10
Main
Window

Special Features
REPORTS —> button — provides the user with access to a range of
reports, including:
• Target Location report
• Facility Details report
• Slot Well Reference Point report
• Slot Drill Datum report
• Well Details report
• Allocated Rigs report
Some reports are only available from specific application sub-windows:,
namely:
• Report: Single Target (from geological target boundary window)
• Magnetic Declination (from magnetic declination window)
All reports selected via the main window option will refer to the user
default field, facility and well. For reports on current selections, the user is
obliged to request them from the other windows in the application.

Field Details
The field details window enables the user to create a field, to define its
development status, to build a list of the blocks which make it up and to
specify the geodetic projection and datum which are to be used for it. The
window also enables the user to delete fields and offers access to the target
location details window.

4-18 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Well Initialization

Figure 4-11
Field Details

Special features
BLOCK ALLOCATE… — invokes a pick list of blocks from which the
user can build a list of those included in the field.
BLOCK DEALLOCATE… — enables the user to remove entries from the
block list created by the BLOCK ALLOCATE feature.
CREATE FIELD — enables the user to enter a new name in the FIELD
NAME text field.
DELETE FIELD — deletes the currently selected field.
TARGET LOCATION DETAILS…— opens the target location details
window.

Target Location Details


This window enables the user to create new targets for the field and to
remove unwanted targets.
Targets are specified by a name, a geological formation, their geographical
or projection co-ordinates and their TVDs relative to MSL. Either type of
co-ordinate data may be entered; the application will carry out a conversion
and display the equivalent values in the other system. The user must also
define a geological boundary for each target.

Reference Guide 4-19


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Well Initialization DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

To make the data entry process as simple as possible, it is suggested that


the target location details and geological target boundary windows are
opened together. However, this procedure is not mandatory; the user is free
to define and save targets and then add boundary details to them later.

Figure 4-12
Target Location
Details

Special features
DELETE TARGET — deletes the currently selected target
FACILITY DETAILS… — opens the facility details window
REPORT: ALL TARGETS… — produces a list of all of the targets in the
field, together with their geological boundary details.

Geological Target Boundary


After a geological target’s location and depth have been defined, its
boundary can be described in this window.
The user specifies the plane of the target and then describes its boundary,
either as a circle or as a polygon with up to sixteen vertices.
As soon as a circular target’s radius has been entered, the polygon vertex
table will be completed with the corresponding definition of a sixteen sided
regular polygon. If necessary, the user can edit the values in this definition
and the system will assume that a polygonal target is now intended.

4-20 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Well Initialization

Figure 4-13
Geological
Target
Boundary
Details

Special features
TARGET text field — displays the name of the currently selected target.
DELETE — deletes the currently selected polygon vertex.
REPORT: SINGLE TARGET… — produces a report of the geological
boundary details of the current target.

Facility Details
The facility details window enables the user to create, edit and delete
facilities.
A panel in the middle of the window can be used to edit a list of fields
which are to be considered during target allocation and directional well
planning anti-collision scans. Fields in this list are called “Associated”
fields.
The user must also define the location and slot details for each facility. To
make the data entry process as simple as possible, it is suggested that these
details are added just after the facility has been created. However, this
procedure is not mandatory; the user is free to define and save facilities and
then add the other details later.

Reference Guide 4-21


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Well Initialization DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Figure 4-14
Facility
Details

Special features
FACILITY NAME pick list — lists all of the facilities in the current field
— disabled while a new facility is being created.
FACILITY TYPE pick list — the user’s selection determines whether
single or multi-well initialization is to take place. The following table
shows the associations:

Facility Well Facility Well


Satellite Wellhead Single Multi-Well Land Site Multi

Conductor Support Single Platform Multi

Conductor Support (multi) Multi Single Subsea Wellhead Single

Subsea Cluster Multi Subsea Template Multi

Land Well Single

FIELD DISASSOCIATE — removes an entry from the list of fields which


are associated with the current facility.
CREATE FACILITY — clears all except the user default details.
DELETE FACILITY — removes the currently selected facility from the
DEAP database.
MAGNETIC DECLINATION… — opens the magnetic declination
window, allowing manual entry of magnetic declination details
WELL DETAILS… — opens the well details window.

4-22 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Well Initialization

Facility Location Sub-window


Facility location can be entered in either geographical co-ordinates or
projection co-ordinates. The system will take either form, convert it and
display the corresponding values in the other form.
To avoid possible inaccuracy in other applications that may use this data, it
is advisable to select the same mapping projection and geodetic datum as
were specified for the field details.

Figure 4-15
Facility
Location

Special features
FACILITY STATUS pop-up menu — can be set to either planned or actual
On subsequent entry to this window, actual location details will be
displayed by default if they exist, but planned details can be viewed by
selecting PLANNED from the pop-up menu.
If no location data exists at all, the system will assume that the facility
location status is PLANNED.
SURVEY REFERENCE pop-up menu — can be set to either TRUE or
GRID North; if this setting is changed after slot details have been entered,
the slot azimuths will be adjusted accordingly.
FACILITY and WELL CENTERED REFERENCING radio buttons —
select facility or well centred referencing systems.
REPORT: FACILITY DETAILS… — displays the facility details report.

Facility and Well Centered Referencing


A facility may be initialised so that all local north and east co-ordinate data
is computed and displayed with respect to the facility reference point
(FRP), irrespective of the well that is currently being worked on.

Reference Guide 4-23


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Well Initialization DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Alternatively, local co-ordinates can be shown with respect to the drilling


datum of the user’s default well. These modes are called facility and well
centred referencing and are included to meet the different working
conventions of the USA and Europe. The angular reference is taken as the
survey reference direction (true or grid north).

Figure 4-16 Facility and Well Centered Referencing

N Facility N Well
Centered Centered

(0,0)
E
(0,0)
E User’s
FRP default well

Slot Details Sub-window — Single Well


This window is used to specify the location and orientation of a single
well’s slot. It will appear if the user has selected a single well facility type
in the facility details window.
For a single well, the application will assume that the U and V offsets of
the slot are both zero and that inclination and azimuth are the same at the
drilling datum and the well reference point.

Figure 4-17
Slot Details —
Single Well

Slot Details Sub-window — Multiple Wells


This window is used to specify the location and orientation of a number of
slots. It will appear if the user has selected a multi-well facility type in the
facility details window.

4-24 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Well Initialization

Each slot’s details are given with respect to the datum bay and to the well
reference point. Because the two sets of data will very often be identical,
the application will automatically copy entries from the slot drilling datum
text fields into the slot WRP fields and vice versa, if the corresponding
field is empty.

Figure 4-18
Slot Details —
Multiple Wells

Special features
DELETE SLOT — deletes the currently selected slot
REPORTS–> — displays the slot details reports at drilling datum and well
reference point.

Magnetic Declination Sub-window


Within DEAP, the BGS geomagnetic model is normally used for deriving
locations. However, there are areas of the world where this method is
inappropriate. In such cases it would be more appropriate to enter
measured magnetic declination details manually.

Figure 4-19
Magnetic
Declination

Reference Guide 4-25


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Well Initialization DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Normally, variations in magnetic declinations are recorded annually and


are required to be retained for historical purposes. Within the DEAP
directional drilling support system, the survey correction calculations
require the declination to be measured at the time of the survey reading, or
as close to that time as possible.
Magnetic declination will primarily be used to derive survey locations
within the directional survey calculator, although it will also be applied
within the instrument performance modules.
The most appropriate declination for a survey is identified as the one
closest to the survey date or the most recent one prior to the survey date.
Where the date of a survey is more than a year after the most recent
declination measurement, the user will be advised that the declination is
out-of-date. Where no magnetic declination details are entered manually,
the BGS geomagnetic model will be used. In this case, no out-of-date
warnings will be issued.

Special Feature
REPORT — displays the magnetic declination report, showing the date,
magnetic declination, total field strength and magnetic dip entered in the
magnetic declination window.

Well Details
This window enables the user to create wells and to allocate targets at well,
slot or facility level. The user can also build up a list of fields which are
associated with the current well.

Figure 4-20
Well Details

4-26 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Well Initialization

Special features
WELL NAME pick list — displays all of the wells assigned to the current
facility; it is unselectable when adding a new well.
SLOT pick list — displays all of the slots defined in the slot details
window; it is selectable only when a new well is being added.
ADD WELL NAME — clears the WELL NAME text field so that a new
name can be entered directly.
DELETE WELL NAME — deletes the currently selected well and de-
allocates all of its targets.
WELL HEADER DATA… — opens the well header data window. Well
header data entry is optional, it is not necessary to complete any of the
fields in the window.

Figure 4-21
Well Header
Data

FIELD – ASSOCIATE — displays a list of the fields which contain targets


or which are to be considered during directional well planning anti-
collision scans.

Note: An associated field can provide targets for allocation to


the current well and will provide the DDSS directional
well planning application with a list of wells which
should be included in anti-collision scans.

FIELD – DISASSOCIATE — removes an entry from the field list built up


using the FIELD – ASSOCIATE feature.

Note: All of the targets in an external field must de-allocated


from the subject facility and its wells before the field can
be disassociated. If the external field was only associated
because its wells were to have been included in anti-
collision scans, it can be disassociated immediately.

Reference Guide 4-27


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Well Initialization DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

ALLOCATE TARGET TO: pop-up menu — enables the user to select the
level at which the target should be allocated. The options available are
well, slot or facility. When an option has been selected, the target name
panel will display the names of the targets allocated to the current facility,
slot or well.
TARGET NAME – ALLOCATE — displays a pick list of the targets in the
current field and in the associated fields at the selected level. The allocation
process is completed when the user presses the SAVE button.
TARGET NAME – DEALLOCATE — opens the de-allocate target
window, which allows the user to remove an entry from the target list built
up using the allocation feature.The user selects to de-allocate a target from
a well, a well and a slot, or a well, slot and facility using toggle buttons.

Figure 4-22
De-allocate
Target

ALLOCATE RIGS AND PROGRAMS… — opens the allocate rigs and


programs window.
REPORT… — displays the well details report.

Allocating Rigs and Programs


This window is used to specify the rig(s) which will be in use during a
particular program.
It is left up to the user to check that the selected rigs are going to be
available. The window allows the user to add and delete new rigs and
programs and to add, insert and edit drilling datum details.
The window is made up of two distinct panels, one allowing the user to
specify the program name and type and to add a new program name (by
way of the NEW PROGRAM button), and the other displaying a scrolled
list of allocated rigs and their datum details. Included in this list are: RIG
NAME, RIG TYPE, and VALID FROM and VALID TO dates and times
— a rig may have a number of drilling datum details associated with it.
If there is no program present when the user opens this window, the system
defaults to providing a program name which is the same as the well name.

4-28 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Well Initialization

.
Figure 4-23
Allocate Rigs
and Programs

Special Features
ADD PROGRAM… — allows the user to add a program which will then
be added to the pick list. A new program must have at least one rig
allocated to it before it may be saved to the database.

Note: Only the program name may be created here within the
well initialization application, all other details must be
completed within program initialization.

ADD NEW RIG — allows the user to add a rig to the end of the scrolled
list of allocated rigs.
INSERT RIG — allows the user to add a rig to the scrolled list
immediately above the current cursor position.
DELETE — allows the user to delete rigs and datum details from the
scrolled list, but only if the program is not the current program — once the
program is specified as started within program initialization, deletion is not
allowed. Program deletion is only possible from within the program
initialization application.
ADD DATUM DETAILS… — allows the user to add an entry to the end
of the list of drilling datum date details for the selected rig. It will only be
possible to do this if the details fit into the chronological order of the list.
INSERT DATUM DETAILS… — allows the user to insert an entry into
the list of drilling datum date details for the selected rig, at a point
immediately above the current cursor position. Again, it will only be
possible to do this if the details fit into the chronological order of the list.

Reference Guide 4-29


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Well Initialization DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

EDIT DATUM DETAILS… — opens the drilling datum details window


and allows the user to edit selected drilling datum details. This window is
used for specifying the offsets of the drilling datum from the well reference
point, MSL and the mud line for the rig..

Figure 4-24
Drilling Datum
Details

Sidetrack Initialization
Not available to all users, the sidetrack initialization main window displays
the name of the well being sidetracked, its program name, details of the rig
which is drilling the sidetrack, kick-off MD and date. All of the depths
displayed in the window are relative to the well’s current drilling datum.

Figure 4-25
Sidetrack
Initialization
Main
Window

4-30 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Well Initialization

Well initialization may supply several items of data to this sub-application


or it may supply only the name of the parent well. For the sake of
completeness, the following procedure assumes that only the parent well’s
name has been supplied.
Before using the sidetrack initialization application, the correct well and
program must be chosen in well initialization. The PROGRAM NAME
text field will display the name of the program selected in user defaults,
and the RIG text field will display the name of the rig currently operating
on the selected well.

Special Features
SIDETRACK FROM text field — displays the name and short name of the
well selected in well initialization.
SIDETRACK NAME pick list — lists the names and kick off points of all
sidetrack wells branching from the well selected in well initialization.
DATUM DETAILS… — opens the sidetrack datum details window for the
rig allocated to the well on the kick off date indicated. This window is used
for specifying the offsets of the drilling datum from the well reference
point, MSL and the mud line for the rig which is to drill the sidetrack.

Figure 4-26
Sidetrack
Datum Details

CREATE SIDETRACK… — prepares the window for the creation of a


new sidetrack well and generates a new default name for the sidetrack well.
DELETE SIDETRACK… — deletes all data associated with the current
sidetrack well.
UPDATED BY and ON text fields — read only details of who created or
updated the sidetrack and when it was done. These fields will be updated
when the user saves new data.

Reference Guide 4-31


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Well Initialization DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Create Sidetrack Sub-window

Figure 4-27
Create
Sidetrack

Special Features
SIDETRACK FROM pick list — once a well is selected from this list, the
application will add a “[#]” (starting at 2) to the name of the parent well to
generate a name for the sidetrack.
The parent well will retain its original name. The sidetrack’s name may be
edited if necessary. A “[#]” will also be added to the sidetrack well’s short
name and to the program name. For example:
• Parent well 9/9a-A01(A5)
• First sidetrack w/same name 9/9a-A01(A5), [2]
• Second sidetrack w/same name 9/9a-A01(A5), [3]
• Third sidetrack, w/different name 9/9a-A01(A5)z
WITH NEW WELL toggle button — this button allows users to specify
that this sidetrack is to be treated as a completely new well. If a new well is
specified, then the sidetrack name/short name text field labels change
accordingly and allow entry of new well names.
WITH NEW PROGRAM toggle button — this button allows users to
specify that they want a new program/reporting period to commence with
this sidetrack. If not, then reporting will continue sequentially for the new
sidetrack under the current program. If a new program is specified, then the
program text field is active to allow entry of a new program name.
COMMENTS — allows users to give a brief (255 character) description of
the sidetrack, reasons for the sidetrack, and so forth.

4-32 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Well Initialization

Sidetrack Naming Scheme Diagrams


Two Mechanical Sidetracks, No Renaming

Figure 4-28
9/9a-A01(A5) a
Two
Mechanical
Sidetracks 9/9a-A01(A5),[2]
All on same
program or all
different b

9/9a-A01(A5)
c 9/9a-A01(A5),[3]

9/9a-A01(A5),[3]
9/9a-A01(A5),[2]

Reference Guide 4-33


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Well Initialization DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

One Sidetrack, New Name

Figure 4-29 a
One
Sidetrack
9/9a-A01(A5)

9/9a-A01(A5)Z

Two Sidetracks, One Rename, One Mechanical w/no Rename

Figure 4-30 a
Two
Sidetracks
9/9a-A01(A5)
One rename,
one
mechanical,
no rename

9/9a-A01(A5)Z

9/9a-A01(A5)Z,[2]

4-34 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Well Initialization

Three Sidetracks, Three New Names


a
Figure 4-31
Three 9/9a-A01(A5)
Sidetracks
Three new
names
d

9/9a-A01(A5)Z
b

9/9a-A01(A5)Y
c

9/9a-A01(A5)X

Four Sidetracks, Three New Names, 4th No New Name

Figure 4-32 a
Four
Sidetracks
9/9a-A01(A5)
Three new
names, one 9/9a-A01(A5)X
with no new
name d

9/9a-A01(A5)Z
b

9/9a-A01(A5)Y
c e

9/9a-A01(A5)X[2]

Reference Guide 4-35


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Well Initialization DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Reports
Target Location Details

Available from the main window for the well specified in the user defaults
window and from the target location details window for selected wells.

4-36 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Well Initialization

Single Target Report

Available only from the geological target boundary sub-window of the


target location details window.

Reference Guide 4-37


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Well Initialization DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Facility Details

Available from the main window for the well specified in the user defaults
window and from the facility details window for selected wells.

4-38 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Well Initialization

Facility Magnetic Declination

Available only from the facility magnetic declination sub-window of the


facility details window.

Reference Guide 4-39


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Well Initialization DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Slot/Target and Well Allocation Details

Available from the main window for the well specified in the user defaults
window and from the well details window for selected wells.

4-40 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Well Initialization

Allocated Rig to Program

Available from the main window for the well specified in the user defaults
window and from the allocate rig to program window for selected wells.

Reference Guide 4-41


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Well Initialization DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Slot Details at Well Reference Point

Available from the main window for the well specified in the user defaults
window and from the slot details sub-window of the facility details
window for selected wells.

4-42 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Well Initialization

Slot Details at Drilling Datum

Available from the main window for the well specified in the user defaults
window and from the slot details sub-window of the facility details
window for selected wells.

Reference Guide 4-43


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Well Initialization DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

•Notes•

4-44 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Chapter 5

Program Initialization

The program initialization application provides the user


with a method of creating and following a program through
five stages of development — initialized, planned, started,
completed and closed. A program is a schedule of
procedures which are necessary for implementing designs
to be used in developing a concept. It provides a means of
identifying, costing and assigning priorities to work and is
therefore a key administrative tool for a company’s internal
use or for its use in conjunction with partners or government
bodies.

Reference Guide 5-1


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Program Initialization DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Overview
Normally, a program is created when a project has been officially
sanctioned. An AFE (authorization for expenditure) number is associated
with each program and when the program has reached the completed stage
a real cost is assigned to it. Only the local currency type will be used in
respect of AFEs.
Each program is given a planned duration and then actual start and end
dates, during which times all activities related to the program will be
charged to the relevant AFE.
It is also possible to initiate programs by way of the well initialization
application, setting up the program name there. Such programs may then
be integrated with the program initialization application and further details
added.
Full read/write access to this application, for amending existing programs,
is limited to the drilling foreman, the drilling superintendent, the drilling
engineer, the directional specialist and the project engineer; other users will
have read only access.
Under normal circumstances, programs will be initialized by the office-
based planning engineer or drilling engineer who will be designated as
expert user and will be able to create and delete programs.

Program Initialization Within DEAP


The program initialization application has an impact upon the following
DEAP applications: daily cost tracking, morning report generator and
progress log. Data is supplied to each of these applications when a check
has been made to test whether the relevant program ACTUAL START
DATE is present in the database.
Programs initialized within well initialization will be accessible by the
program initialization application, as mentioned above.

Navigation
Navigation within this application is very simple since it consists of only
one main window of which a portion changes depending on the status of
the program currently being worked on.
One other window prompts the user for a program name when a new
program is to be added, and a third allows the user to enter information
regarding any suspensions to a program whose status is that of STARTED.

5-2 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Program Initialization

The suspensions window is new in DEAP v3.0, as is the program report


that may be generated from the main window.

Main Window Report

Initialized Planned Started Completed Closed

New Program Suspensions

Application Main Window


This application has one main window in which the central portion changes
appearance depending on which of the five program status options has
been set in the upper portion of the screen.
On each variant of the program initialization window, the upper portion
contains an array of initialized buttons allowing specification of subject
type, subject, program name, program type, program status, currency,
previous program and AFE number.
The lower part of the screen contains information on when the program
was first initialized and by whom it was created, below which there are
buttons allowing the user to add a new program and to delete a program.
A program may only be deleted if it has no dependencies; that is to say that
no program may be deleted if it is currently being used within another
user’s set of user defaults or if it has already been reported against.
Nor may a program be deleted if another program refers to it as its previous
program in the PREV PROGRAM field. If dependencies do exist, a
suitable message will be displayed to warn the user of the situation.

Reference Guide 5-3


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Program Initialization DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Program Initialization - Initialized

Figure 5-1
Program
Initialization
— Initialized

Special features
NEW PROGRAM… — Opens the new program window.
When a new program is added, the default program status will be set to
INITIALIZED and the CURRENCY and PROGRAM TYPE will be
passed down from the previous program. The program initialization
window will then be updated with the new program name.

Figure 5-2
New Program

5-4 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Program Initialization

Program Initialization — Planned

Figure 5-3
Program
initialization
— Planned

Program Initialization — Started

Figure 5-4
Program
Initialization
— Started

The date entered as a default by the application in the DATE OF REPORT


NUMBER 1 data field will be the date/time of the first available reporting
period based on the site default settings for reporting periods.
If the entry appearing in this field does not make sense in any way, the user
should contact the DBA since it may indicate a serious fault with the site
defaults.

Reference Guide 5-5


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Program Initialization DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Special features
SUSPENSION… — opens the suspension window, into which the user
may enter details regarding suspensions for a well program, including date
and time from and to as well as a reason for the suspension.

Figure 5-5
Suspension
window

Program Initialization — Completed

Figure 5-6
Program
Initialization
— Completed

5-6 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Program Initialization

Program Initialization — Closed

Figure 5-7
Program
initialization
— Closed

Reference Guide 5-7


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Program Initialization DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Report
Program Initialization Program Report

5-8 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Chapter 6

Bit / BHA Actual

The Bit/BHA application has four main functions: creating


BHAs by selecting components from the rig inventory or
from the catalogs, and by copying and modifying existing
BHAs; entering and editing BHA run details; entering and
editing the details of the BHA components, including the bit
if there is one in the BHA; generating reports of the bit and
BHA details.

Reference Guide 6-1


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Bit / BHA Actual DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Overview
Links with other applications
Bit/BHA communicates with the morning drilling report and with the
inventory system if it is available. Bit condition and bit run and
performance data can be transferred bi-directionally between Bit/BHA and
the morning drilling report.

Note: The details of a BHA are not editable after it has


appeared in a morning drilling report.

When the DEAP inventory system is available to the user, it can be used to
supply details of the various BHA components. It will reflect any
movements of BHA components to and from the inventory and any
changes in their condition as entered in the Bit/BHA application.

Navigation
Main
Window

Make Up
BHA Copy BHA Edit BHA Delete BHA Reports

BHA Bit Run/ Edit Bit


Details Performance Component

Copy Add Edit Delete Move Inventory


Component Component Component Component Component

Stabilization Catalog
Details

Variable
Blade Details
Component BHA BHA Data Graphical
History Summary Sheet Bit Report Report
Catalog

Inventory

Typical Sequence
For a new BHA, the user begins by opening the make up BHA window and
specifying the type of BHA which is to be defined.

6-2 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Bit / BHA Actual

Then, for both undefined and existing BHAs, the next step is to open the
edit BHA window. From this window, the user can either describe the bit
and its performance or move on to sections which deal with all of the other
BHA components.
New components can be selected from the DEAP catalog system, or from
the DEAP inventory system if it is available. Components can be edited
and their details can be examined via the edit component window and its
four sub-windows.

Application Main Window


The main window is the starting point for all operations on BHAs. A
selected BHA can be edited, copied or deleted, and the system can be
instructed to start the creation of an entirely new BHA from this window.
For BHAs incorporating bits, select either the BHA RUN NO or the BIT
NO from a pick list. When a BHA does not incorporate a bit, it must be
specified by BHA RUN NO.
• The Make Up BHA and Copy BHA options are not available while
any BHA has a BHA STATUS of “Make Up.”
• The Delete BHA option is only available for BHAs which have not
been included in a morning drilling report.

Figure 6-1
Bit/BHA Main
Window

Special feature
REPORT button — invokes a menu of report types. After one has been
selected, the DEAP report window will be displayed.

Reference Guide 6-3


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Bit / BHA Actual DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Make Up BHA
This window enables the user to create a new BHA by specifying its type.
BHA STATUS will always be “Make Up” for the new BHA.

Figure 6-2
Make Up BHA

Edit BHA
The edit BHA window enables the user to edit the BHA run details. The
user can also access the BHA details, edit bit and bit run/performance
windows.
PROGRESS MADE is automatically calculated from the M.DEPTH IN
and M.DEPTH OUT figures. FISH LENGTH becomes editable and
mandatory if the BHA status is FISH or LOST IN HOLE.
If the user selects RUN COMPLETE from the BHA STATUS pick list, all
the BHA components will be returned to the inventory system if it is in use.

Figure 6-3
Edit BHA
window

6-4 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Bit / BHA Actual

Special feature
MUD WEIGHT — defaults to the most recent fluid density entered in the
fluid actual application.
BIT NO — enables the user to add another bit.
WGT. BELOW JAR — this field will appear in the lower left hand corner
of the window when a jar component is included in the string. The weight
below jar will be calculated automatically by the system but may be
overridden by the user.

Edit Bit Component


This window opens in response to the user selecting EDIT BIT… on the
edit BHA window or clicking on the EDIT DETAIL button for a bit, hole
opener or under reamer in the BHA details window.
The window will also open automatically when one of these three
components is inserted into the BHA. The icon in the corner of the window
will correspond to the type of component being edited.
Two versions of this window are available; one for use when the DEAP
stock control and inventory system is available, and similar version for use
when stock control is not available. The only difference is that an inventory
button appears in the former and not in the latter.

Figure 6-4
Edit Bit
Component
Details

If the selected component is a roller cone bit, only the top four nozzle sizes
text fields (three peripheral nozzles and one central (C) nozzle) will be
editable. For other types of bit, the 17 nozzle size text fields at the bottom
of the window become sensitive.

Reference Guide 6-5


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Bit / BHA Actual DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

A selection from the catalog or from the inventory will overwrite any data
displayed in the window.

Special features
TFA and NOZZLE SIZES — TFA can be calculated automatically from
nozzle sizes. Alternatively, it can be entered directly.
CUM FTG (cumulative footage) and CUM ROT HRS (cumulative rotating
hours) — read only text fields, displaying data from the stock control
system if it is available.

Bit Run/Performance
This window enables the user to edit and review details of the bit run and
the bit’s condition at the end of the run. The PROGRESS MADE text field
is read only and is only applicable to drilling, coring, under reaming, hole
opening, drill/dress cement, cutting casing and milling window BHAs
whose status is RUN COMPLETE.

Figure 6-5
Bit Run/
Performance

New fields in DEAP v3.0


AVG MW — combined with AVG CIRC RATE and TFA (when all details
are present), used in the calculation of AVG HSI.
AVG HSI — calculated automatically when there is no previous value, but
may also be entered or overwritten by the user.
SURFACE RPM; ON BOTTOM RPM — replaces the old AVG RPM.

6-6 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Bit / BHA Actual

ROTATING DISTANCE — if DEPTH OUT is entered, and either rotating


or sliding distance is entered, the other is updated automatically. When
DEPTH OUT is entered, the value generated for PROGRESS MADE will
also be provided as a default for ROTATING DISTANCE.
SLIDING DISTANCE — see ROTATING DISTANCE. The sum of
ROTATING and SLIDING DISTANCES must not exceed total
PROGRESS MADE.

BHA Details
The BHA details window displays a diagram of the structure of the
selected BHA. The structure can be modified by adding or deleting
components, or by moving components within it.
A component which is to be moved is first deleted from its original
location, held on a temporary clipboard while the user selects a new
location, and then pasted back into the BHA. A new copy facility is
available, which works in a similar manner..

Figure 6-6
BHA Details

Six read only text fields describe each of the BHA components: NAME,
SERIAL NO, QUANTITY, LENGTH, MAX OD and CUMULATIVE
DISTANCE. The serial number field will only appear if the DEAP stock
control system is available.

Reference Guide 6-7


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Bit / BHA Actual DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

The cumulative distance field displays the distance from the tip of the bit to
the top of the component. When several components of the same type are
grouped together in a single entry, the figure quoted will be the distance
from the tip of the bit, or the tip of the lowest component, to the top of the
highest component in the group.
By clicking on the icon at the left hand end of an entry, the user can initiate
the add, delete, copy and move processes, and also navigate to the
appropriate sub-window for editing the details of the selected component.
If one of the edit component windows is open, the details it displays will be
updated as soon as the user selects a component in the BHA details
window. The positions of integral and clamp-on stabilizers within the BHA
are listed in a text field at the top of the window.

Add BHA Component


The add BHA component window can be accessed either by clicking the
ADD COMPONENT… button on the BHA details window, or by selecting
one of the insert options from a pop-up menu under a component icon.
Component category is selected from a set of icons, then a type is selected
from a pick list. The final choice of an individual item is made from the
catalog or from the inventory.

Figure 6-7
Add BHA
Component

Special features
ADD TO TOP, INSERT ABOVE and INSERT BELOW radio buttons —
select the location of the new component in relation to the currently
selected component in the BHA details window; by default, the top
component will be selected.

6-8 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Bit / BHA Actual

Editing BHA Components


When a BHA component has been selected from either the BHA details
window or the add BHA component window, the edit BHA component
window will open. This window enables the user to edit details of BHA
components other than bits, hole openers and under reamers. It also offers
access to the stabilization details and variable blade sub-windows.
There are two versions of the window; a comprehensive window for use
when the DEAP stock control and inventory system is available, and a
simplified version for use when stock control is not available.
The user is free to select items from the catalog even if stock control is
installed. This may be necessary when, for instance, an item has not yet
been included in the stock control system.
When the window opens, its contents will depend on whether the user is
editing an existing BHA component or adding a new one.
If a new component is being added, the text fields will be empty until the
component has been selected from the catalog or from the inventory
system. The icon in the corner will reflect the type of component which has
been selected.

Figure 6-8
Edit BHA
Component
window
For use with
Stock Control

Editing Existing BHA Components (with Stock Control)


The text fields displayed in the window will depend on the selected
component. For simplicity of explanation, all of the fields have been listed
and the user should disregard those which are inappropriate.

Reference Guide 6-9


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Bit / BHA Actual DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Figure 6-9
Edit BHA
Component
For use without
Stock Control

Editing Existing BHA Components (without Stock Control)


The text fields displayed in the window will depend on the selected
component. For simplicity of explanation, all of the fields have been listed
and the user should disregard those which are inappropriate.

Stabilization Details
This window enables the user to enter the stabilization data for the selected
component. The data required depends on the particular component.
For core barrels, motors and turbines, only BLADE OD, BLADE
LENGTH and DIST BELOW (distance from bottom) are enterable as they
represent the points of stabilization for these components.
For drill collars and MWD, data can be entered in all of the text fields since
they represent clamp-on stabilizers attached to drill collars and MWDs.
The serial number field refers to the clamp-on stabilizers.

Figure 6-10
Stabilization
Details

6-10 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Bit / BHA Actual

Special features
ADD — adds a new, blank row to the bottom of the table
DELETE — removes the currently selected row from the table

Variable Blade Stabilizer


This window enables the user to build up a table describing the way in
which a variable blade stabilizer has been used. The table displays the MD
from which the stabilizer was run and the diameter to which it was set at
the start of the run.
Figure 6-11
Variable Blade
Stabilizer Details

Special features
ADD — adds a new, blank row to the bottom of the table
DELETE — removes the currently selected row from the table

Reference Guide 6-11


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Bit / BHA Actual DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Reports
Four reports are available from the bit/BHA actual application:
• Bit Record
• BHA Data Sheet (Graph)
• BHA Data Sheet
• BHA Summary
The reports are selectable from a pop-up menu on the main window. After
selection, the report is sent to the standard DEAP report generator. For
further details see the Introduction to DEAP.

Bit Record

6-12 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Bit / BHA Actual

BHA Data Sheet (Graphic Display)

Reference Guide 6-13


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Bit / BHA Actual DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

BHA Data Sheet

6-14 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Bit / BHA Actual

BHA Summary Report

Reference Guide 6-15


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Bit / BHA Actual DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

•Notes•

6-16 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
odn
Chapter 7

Casing Actual

The casing actual application has been designed to fulfil the


requirement for recording and reporting on the details of
actual casing tasks carried out during drilling and
completion operations. It has links with well planning
applications and the morning report generator.

Reference Guide 7-1


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Casing Actual DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Overview
The data held within the casing actual application may be edited by the
user — this will have no effect on the well planning data.
The reports should normally be produced at intervals of several days or
weeks. An indicator that the casing actual report should be produced will
be raised by the progress log application, if the task “run casing” has been
reported in the log. However, this does not put any constraints on the user
— the reports may be run before this if desired.

Note: The links to the well planning applications have not yet
been implemented in this release of the software.

Navigation

Main Reports
Window

Casing Casing Details Report Summary Report


Details

Wellhead Casing String Centralization


Details Details Details

Navigation through the casing actual application has been designed to be


very straightforward. Selecting either the add or the edit feature on the
main window will call up the casing details window and from there the
user will be able to import data from the well planning system (dependent
upon the availability of such data), and call up and edit details of strings,
wellheads and centralizers.

7-2 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Casing Actual

Application Main Window


The main window displays the names of the current rig and well in addition
to a scrolled list of all existing casing job reports for that well.
The casing jobs are listed in descending order based on OD size, with the
list being regenerated when a new report has been added.
Access to the reports is limited in that only privileged users are allowed full
access to add, edit, delete and view reports — other users only have access
to view and print report data. The ADD…, EDIT… and DELETE…
buttons will always be unselectable for such users.
The EDIT…, DELETE… and REPORT… buttons will remain
unselectable until an existing casing job report has been selected in the
scrolled list.
Figure 7-1
Casing Actual
Main Window

Special Feature
A REPORT… button — to produce the casing job report which consists of
six sections: a heading, casing sections details, additional details,
centralization details, wellhead details and comments.

Casing Details
The casing details window allows the user to define and maintain casing
details data.
The window is divided into several distinct areas, with the main area
holding details about the casing, such as type, job start time, casing on
bottom time, etc.

Reference Guide 7-3


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Casing Actual DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Many of these fields are mandatory and have to be completed before the
user may progress to further screens via the string, wellhead and
centralization details buttons.

Figure 7-2
Casing
Details

For convenience all of the mandatory fields have been grouped together in
the block starting at CASING TYPE down to the SHOE DEPTH fields.
The STRING DETAILS, WELLHEAD DETAILS and
CENTRALIZATION DETAILS buttons will only be selectable when data
has been entered into all mandatory fields and then saved to the database.

Special Features
COMMENTS — a comments field is available for any free-form text
which the user wishes to enter against a particular casing type. The total
length of comments is limited to 255 characters in this issue of the
software.
IMPORT FROM TUBULAR TALLY… button — will allow the user to
utilize data held in the tubular tally application when tubular tally has
generated a relevant running tally; it will be unselectable when no such
data is available.
IMPORT FROM WELL PLAN… button — to allow the user to make use
of data held in the well planning application; it will be unselectable when
such data is not available.

7-4 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Casing Actual

Note: Although the buttons appear onscreen, the IMPORT


FROM TUBULAR TALLY and IMPORT FROM WELL
PLAN feature have not been implemented in this release
of the software and that button will be unselectable.

EDIT… button — on entry to the casing details window after selecting this
button, the casing type pick list button will be unselectable. The casing
type is displayed for information only.

String Details
The string details window provides the means by which the user manages
casing section information. The details of the string will start at the casing
shoe and work in order upwards to the surface from there.
The main part of the window is taken up with a scrolled list of details of the
individual casing sections, including length, top depth, OD, ID, weight/
length and type of section. The TOP AT field which holds details of the
measured depth of the top of the casing section, is calculated by the system
for information and is not available for editing.
The CATALOG… button and the SECTION TYPE button will both be
unselectable until a row on the scrolled list has been highlighted.
SECTION TYPE will first become selectable and then, once a section type
has been chosen, CATALOG… will become selectable.

Figure 7-3
String
Details

Reference Guide 7-5


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Casing Actual DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

If the IMPORT FROM TUBULAR TALLY feature has been used, the
details required for the individual casing sections will be automatically
entered since the data imported includes casing type, section length, OD,
ID, wt/length, material grade and connection type.

Note: This feature has not been implemented in this issue of the
software.)

Special Features
CATALOG… button — allows quick selection of casing section details
from a list. Only available when a section type has been selected. Manually
entering any of the data items (i.e. OD, ID etc.) relevant to the section type
selected will mean that the catalogue list displayed will be shortened, only
displaying items which conform to the specification.

Wellhead Details
The wellhead details window allows the user to enter and maintain data
concerning the wellhead. This data may be imported from the well
planning system by use of the IMPORT FROM WELL PLAN … button on
the casing details window when such well planning data is available, or it
may be entered manually on this screen. The casing type will be displayed
at the top of the screen for information purposes.

Note: The IMPORT FROM WELL PLAN feature has not been
implemented in this release of the software.

Figure 7-4
Wellhead Details

7-6 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Casing Actual

Centralization Details
This window allows the user to enter and maintain details about
centralizers with a list of all the centralization details for a casing job
displayed in the main part of this window.
The data is presented in descending order of depth based on the FROM
MD value. The casing type will be displayed at the top of the screen for
information purposes.

Figure 7-5
Centralization
Details

Reference Guide 7-7


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Casing Actual DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Reports
Casing Summary Report

7-8 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Casing Actual

Casing Actual Report

Reference Guide 7-9


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Casing Actual DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

•Notes•

7-10 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
b
Chapter 8

Cement Actual

This application was designed to provide the company man,


rigsite drilling engineer and cement engineer with the
ability to add, edit and delete cement jobs, to provide all
users with ability to generate and view reports, and to
interface with the casing actual application within DEAP. In
the future it will interface with the following applications:
drilling fluids actual, stock control, progress log, well
planning and the DEAP catalogs.

Reference Guide 8-1


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Cement Actual DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Overview
The cement actual application has been included in the DEAP system
because of the necessity of recording and reporting on the details of actual
cement jobs being carried out. It allows for the recording of primary
cement job data. These details must be recorded in DEAP in order to be
available for reference during drilling, completion, abandonment or
suspension operations.
Most data has to be entered manually by the company man or the cement
engineer on a rig, with certain details being available for selection from
catalogues. The data may be edited and saved until it has been committed.
There are links to some other applications within DEAP — data will be
available for use in cement actual from the casing actual application.

Navigation
All of the sub-applications are accessible by way of the main window,
which displays icons for this purpose.

Main
Window

Hole Pumping Cementing Cement Remarks


Geometry Table String Volumes

User Defined
Caliper Parameters Mix Water

Fann

Liquid Solid Cement


Additives Additives Properties

8-2 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Cement Actual

Application Main Window


The cement actual main window displays the name of the cement job
currently being worked upon, together with the times at which the job was
started and completed (these times may be entered by selecting the
appropriate clock icon which will call up the standard DEAP date/time
window.
Also available here on the main window are buttons providing the user
with access to add, edit and delete cement jobs, as well as a REPORT…
button which calls up the standard DEAP report viewer.
In the main part of the window there are six icons functioning as buttons
for activating the following sub-applications — HOLE GEOMETRY…,
CEMENTING STRING…, PUMPING TABLE…, CEMENT
VOLUMES… and REMARKS….
Access to the window will be restricted to read only for most users (that is,
the user is given the ability to view the cement job details and to produce a
report), whereas the company man, rigsite drilling engineer and cement
engineer will have full access to all of the features.

Figure 8-1
Cement Actual
– main window

Hole Geometry
The hole geometry window enables the user to build up a tabular
description of the hole by specifying riser, casing, liner and open
hole section details. Casing data can be entered directly, although the use
of a catalogue is recommended.

Reference Guide 8-3


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Cement Actual DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Lines can be added to the table independently of each other, so the


accompanying procedures assume that data entry has been completed after
each line. If several lines are being added to the table, a single APPLY will
be sufficient.
Lines can either be added to the bottom of the table or they can be inserted
into it. The application will not permit inappropriate entries: for instance,
an open hole section will not be permitted above a casing section. The
icons at the bottom of the window change from white on black to black on
white as the sections become unavailable.

Figure 8-2
Hole Geometry

If necessary, open hole ID can be calculated from caliper data.

Figure 8-3
Caliper Input
Window

8-4 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Cement Actual

Cementing String
The cementing string window is used to build up a tabular
description of the string by specifying surface pipe, drill pipe,
HWDP, casing, liner and float equipment details. Casing, liner, drill pipe
and HWDP data can be entered directly, although the use of a catalogue is
recommended.
Lines can be added to the table independently of each other, so the
accompanying procedures assume that data entry has been completed after
each line. If several lines are being added to the table, a single APPLY will
be sufficient.
Lines can either be added to the bottom of the table or they can be inserted
into it. The application will not permit inappropriate entries: for instance, a
liner section will not be permitted above a drill pipe section.
The icons at the bottom of the window change from white on black to black
on white as the sections become unavailable.

Figure 8-4
Cementing
String

Pumping Table
In this window the user specifies the fluids which will be
pumped during mud circulation and cement jobs, showing the
order in which they are to be pumped.

Reference Guide 8-5


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Cement Actual DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

The user enters top depths, volumes and flow rates, and the application will
calculate the pumping time required.
The rows which may be inserted into the scrolled list on this window via
icons are: mud in hole, spacer, cement, shut down, top plug and displacing
fluid. Mud in hole must be specified first before any other entries are made.
The volume quoted in the mud in hole entry is the volume of mud left
behind in the casing at the end of the cement job, and the flow rate quoted
is the circulation rate of mud prior to the cement job.

Figure 8-5
Pumping
Table

Editing Fluid Parameters


The FLUID type is displayed at the top of the screen, taken from the
selection made on the fluid pumping table window.

Figure 8-6
Fluid Parameters
Table

8-6 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Cement Actual

Fluid data can be entered either directly or in terms of FANN rheometer


readings. This is selectable by way of radio buttons providing the choice
between RHEOLOGY FROM FANN DATA or USER INPUT
RHEOLOGY.
If the user selects the option USER INPUT RHEOLOGY, the values for
PV, YP, TEN MINUTE GEL and FLUID DENSITY have to be entered
manually.
If the FANN DATA option is selected, a second window will open, the
Fann input window; this allows for entry of Fann values at instrument
revolution speed readings of 600, 300, 200, 100, 6 and 3 or other readings
selected by the user (see below for details of this window).
The PV and YP entries on the fluid parameters table are calculated from
the 600 and 300 readings, therefore readings at these two speeds must be
entered.

Figure 8-7
Fann Input

Cement Volumes
This window produces figures for water required, slurry yield,
total cement and total mix water for the selected cement slurry.
The application also produces a slurry report which summarizes the data
entered by the user and lists the final job details.
After describing solid and liquid additives, cement properties and mix
water, the user can run the calculator. Volume and weight data will be fed
back into the additives windows. Slurry density is imported automatically
from the fluid properties window; slurry volume is imported from the
pumping table.

Reference Guide 8-7


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Cement Actual DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Figure 8-8
Cement
Volumes

Solid Additives

Figure 8-9
Solid
Additives

8-8 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Cement Actual

Liquid Additives

Figure 8-10
Liquid
Additives

Cement Properties

Figure 8-11
Cement
Properties

Mix Water Properties

Figure 8-12
User Defined
Mix Water
Properties

Reference Guide 8-9


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Cement Actual DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Remarks Window
The remarks window is designed to allow the user to enter an
unlimited amount of free text covering details of the current
cement job. Use of this window is straightforward — the text just has to be
typed straight into the box.

Figure 8-13
Remarks

8-10 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Cement Actual

Reports

Reference Guide 8-11


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Cement Actual DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

•Notes•

8-12 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Chapter 9

Geology Actual

This application was designed to allow for a simple geology


data set to be entered into DEAP quickly and easily, for use
in enhanced reports and data analysis. It offers a simple user
interface, requiring a minimum level of geologic detail; an
underlying data model designed to accommodate a richer
dataset, if required; the capability of importing data
exported from other packages; the capability of producing
meaningful reports and analyses using any of these levels of
data.

Reference Guide 9-1


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Geology Actual DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Overview
The application is launched from the daily operations section of the DEAP
application launcher (APL) and starts up in the open window state.
All input and display of data is controlled on a single main screen. This
screen contains the data input fields and a graphical display of the data in
the form of a lithology column.

Geology Details
The level of detail of geological information is kept to the minimum
required in order to produce meaningful reports and analysis by this and
other applications. This includes the following items:
• Top Depth (MD)
• Formation Name
• Lithology Type
• Boundary Type
• Comments
While the interface only provides this focused view, presenting the user
with the detail level shown above, the underlying data model is designed to
accommodate a richer dataset if required.

Datasets
Two datasets may be entered through the Geology Actual application:
• Observed
• Definitive
The definitive geology will originate from imported and/or geologist
entered data. Access permission to change the definitive geology dataset
will be limited to the geologist.

Geological Nomenclature
Pick lists for geologic data (formation names, lithology type, etc.) are
specific for the operator as defined by the facility and the current region of
operation.
Display of data by another operator or outside the region of data entry will
be in the original nomenclature of the data at the point of entry.

9-2 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Geology Actual

Data Migration
No export driving facilities are available from within geology actual.
However, import facilities are provided for flat ascii, comma separated
field style files of geological data exported by other packages such as
Finder, Openworks and PDB.
All imported data is flagged as definitive.

Data Access
Access to the observed dataset is subject to the normal DEAP access
privileges. Access to the definitive dataset is subject to data origin.
Imported definitive data is read only for all. Definitive data entered through
DEAP is read/write for the geologist only and read for all others.

Navigation

Main
Window

Import Data Report


Dialog Box Dialog Box

Report
Window

Reference Guide 9-3


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Geology Actual DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Application Main Window


The main screen is divided into two distinct areas:
• Left - Graphical display area.
• Right - Data input and display area.
The right data input and display area allows entry of new and modification
of existing geological data details specific to the newly added or currently
selected section respectively. Data that is obtainable from pre-defined
reference data is selected via the popup pick lists.
The left graphical display area shows a graphical representation of the data
in the form of a lithologic column. This is updated with any additions or
modifications from the data on the right when applied. The graphical area
is interactive allowing geological sections to be selected. Details of the
selected section are displayed in the right area for modification.
Figure 9-1
Main
Window

9-4 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Geology Actual

Special features
The following sections detail the functionality of each of the main screens
display components. Components are considered always available unless
otherwise specified.

User Defaults button


Displays the standard DEAP user defaults selection screen. Changes to the
user defaults are reflected in the displayed geology actual data when
applied. A warning box will appear if any data has not been applied.

Exit button
Exits the geology actual application. A confirmation warning is displayed
prior to exit. If changes have been applied to the data but not saved then a
data loss confirmation warning is displayed.

Info button
Displays the standard DEAP application information screen.

Well label
Shows the currently selected well from the user defaults. For display
purposes only.

Updated By label
Displays the last person, date and time the data was updated. For display
purposes only.

Observed option menu


Switches the currently displayed dataset between the Observed and
Definitive.
Default is the Observed dataset.

Source text field


Displays and allows entry of a description of the definitive data origin.
Only available when the definitive dataset is selected.

Zoom In (+) glyph button


Reduces the current scale of the graphical display of the lithological
column by half allowing display of more detail and thin lithologic sections
potentially hidden by the resolution of the display.
Available magnification: up to 1600%. Default is 100%.

Reference Guide 9-5


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Geology Actual DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Zoom Out (-) glyph button


Increases the current scale of the graphical display of the lithologic column
by two allowing display of more sections but potential loss of detail such as
thin lithologicsections.
Available decrease in magnification: down to 6.25%. Default is 100%.

Formation table column


Displays the short formation name associated with the geological sections.
Display of the value is dependent on the current scale of the graphical
display.

Lithology table column


Displays a graphical representation of the geological sections lithology.
The symbols used to represent the lithology are defined via reference data
and are client dependent.
If no lithology is defined for the section then the formation name is
displayed. If neither the lithology or formation is defined for the section
then the displayed section is left blank.
Each displayed section is selectable. Selecting a section displays the details
for that section on the right side of the screen.

Depth table column


Displays the top measured depth of the geological sections. Display of the
value is dependent on the current scale of the graphical display.

Modifying Section label


Indicates whether the current section data is being modified or is for a
newly added section. For display purposes only.

Depth (MD) text field


Displays and allows entry or modification of the top measured depth of a
new or currently selected geological section.
This field is both access and dataset dependent. For the Actual dataset, Rig
engineers have read/write access. For the Definitive dataset, Geologists
read/write access, all others have read only access.
This field is mandatory; a value is required with in the valid limits of
measured depth. For new sections the value will default to null.

9-6 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Geology Actual

Formation pick list


Displays and allows entry or modification of the formation name
associated with a new or currently selected geological section via a picklist.
Available values in the picklist come from reference data which is area
dependent.
This pick list is access and dataset dependent. For the Actual dataset, Rig
engineers have read/write access. For the Definitive dataset, Geologists
have read/write access; all others have read only access.

Figure 9-2
Formation
Pick List

Lithology pick list


Displays and allows entry or modification of the lithology type associated
with a new or currently selected geological section via a picklist. Available
values in the picklist come from reference data which is client dependent.
This pick list is access and dataset dependent. For the Actual dataset, Rig
engineers have read/write access. For the Definitive dataset, Geologists
have read/write access; all others have read only access.

Figure 9-3
Lithology
Pick List

Reference Guide 9-7


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Geology Actual DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Boundary pick list


Displays and allows entry or modification of the top boundary type of a
new or currently selected geological section via a picklist. Available values
in the picklist come from reference data.
Current reference data defines the following boundary types:
• Formation Top
• Lithology Change
• Fault
This pick list is access and dataset dependent. For the Actual dataset, Rig
engineers have read/write access. For the Definitive dataset, Geologists
have read/write access; all others have read only access.
Figure 9-4
Boundary
Pick List

Comments text field


Displays and allows entry or modification of manually entered comments
associated with a new or currently selected geological section.
Entry is via a multiline text field and is limited to 255 characters. This field
expands with increased screen size to display more text.
This pick list is access and dataset dependent. For the Actual dataset, Rig
engineers have read/write access. For the Definitive dataset, Geologists
have read/write access; all others have read only access.

Total Depth label


Displays the total depth for the durrent well from MDR for information
only.

Apply button
Validates the currently displayed details of the geological section. Updates
the graphical display with the appropriate changes. If the current geological
section is new or the top measured depth has changed then an attempt is
made to update the time cut display.
Only available when changes to current data are pending. Also access and
dataset dependent. For the Actual dataset, Rig engineers have access to this
button. For the Definitive dataset, access is restricted to Geologists.

9-8 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Geology Actual

Add button
Clears the currently displayed geological section data to allow entry of new
section data. A confirmation warning message is displayed if there are any
un-applied changes pending.

Figure 9-5
Warning Box

The section top depth is defaulted to the last section top depth plus 100m.
Applying the new data creates a new section. No two sections may be
added with the same top measured depth. This button is also access and
dataset dependent. For the Actual dataset, Rig engineers have access to this
button. For the Definitive dataset, access is restricted to Geologists.

Delete button
Deletes the currently selected geological section. A confirmation warning
is displayed before the deletion actually occurs. The graphical display is
updated accordingly. Only available if a geological section is currently
selected, this button is also access and dataset dependent. For the Actual
dataset, Rig engineers have access to this button. For the Definitive dataset,
access is restricted to Geologists.

Save button
Saves any applied changes to the database. Only available if there are
modifications to the data which have been applied.

Import... button
Displays the standard DEAP file selector to enable selection of an import
geological data file. The data must be an ascii flat file with comma
separated fields. Data imported in this way is flagged as definitive and is
read only for all. This function is only available to the Geologist.

Help... button
Displays the standard DEAP help book for the application.

Reports... button
Displays the report dialog as detailed in a later section on report generation.
This dialog controls the range and scale of the report.

Reference Guide 9-9


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Geology Actual DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Data Import
Import Dialog Box
The dialog illustrated below appears when the Import... button on the main
screen is clicked.

Figure 9-6
Geology Actual
Import Dialog
Box

This dialog provides standard file selection controls to allow the import
data source file to be specified. Functionality of each of the display
components is outlined in the following sections.

Special Features

Filter text field


Allows specification of the directory and file name pattern to filter the
directory and file selection lists with.

Directories list
Displays and allows selection and navigation of the directory structure.
Double clicking on a listed directory resets the filter and selection to that
directory path. The the Files list (see below) is updated accordingly.

Files list
Displays and allows selection of the file for import.

9-10 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Geology Actual

Selection text field


Allows entry of, or displays the currently selected directory path and file
name.

Ok button
Accepts the currently selected file for import and attempts to read the file
data into DEAP. If an error occurs while opening or reading the file an
appropriate warning message is displayed and the import is aborted.

Filter button
Updates the directory and file lists according to the current directory path
and file filter specification.

Cancel button
Cancels the import function and closes the import dialog box. Control is
returned to the main screen.

Help button
Displays the standard DEAP help book for the import dialog.

Import File Format Specifications


The import data file format has the following specifications. Any file
generated by applications outside the DEAP environment must conform to
these:
• File must be ascii text.
• All new lines should be delimited by a CR and/or LF combination.
• All fields must be comma separated.
• All text fields must be double quotes delimited.
• Text fields may be upper and/or lower case. Import is not case
sensitive.
• All white space between field delimiters and separators is ignored.
• Null numeric fields should contain white space only between comma
separators.
• Null text fields should contain white space only between quote
delimiters.

Reference Guide 9-11


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Geology Actual DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Field Specification And Order


The following table shows the field specification and order:
Table 1: Import File Field Specification

Field No Name Type Format Required

1 Depth Numeric 9999 or 9999.99 Yes

2 Boundary Text “Abcd” No

3 Formation Text “Abcd” No

4 Lithology Text “Abcd” No

5 Comments Text “Abcd” No

Where possible text based field values will be matched on the current
DEAP reference data. This may have been imported from the external
client source but is not guaranteed.

Depth
The depth value must be specified. Lines with a null depth value will be
ignored. The value may be either integer or floating point representation of
the boundary measured depth. The value must be specified in metric units
(m).

Boundary
The boundary field specifies the boundary type associated with the depth.
This value may be null. The value should correspond to one of the valid
boundary types in the current DEAP reference data:
Table 2: Boundary Type Import Reference Data

Name Abbreviation

Formation Top FT

Lithology Change LC

Fault FL

The value may conform to any of the following:


• The boundary type name
• The boundary type abbreviation.
• Any number of the initial characters which uniquely identify the name
or abbreviation.

9-12 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Geology Actual

Formation
The formation field should contain the name of the formation for that
depth. This should conform to the names in the reference tables for the
specific geographic area.

Lithology
This value specifies the lithology type and should correspond to one of the
lithologies in the current DEAP reference data:
Table 3: Lithology Type Import Reference Data

Name Abbreviation

Anhydrite AND

Chalk CHK

Chert CHT

Coal COL

Claystone CST

Dolomite DOL

Granite GRN

Gumbo GUM

Halite HAL

Limestone LIM

Mudstone MST

Shale SHL

Siltstone SLT

Sand SND

Tuff/Ash TUF

Volcanic VOL

The value may be null or conform to any of the following:


• The lithology name
• The lithology abbreviation.
• Any number of the initial characters which uniquely identify the name
or abbreviation.

Reference Guide 9-13


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Geology Actual DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Comments
The comments field allows free form comments. Quotes and commas are
accepted within the field delimiters. The value is not limited in length
(subject to system resources). The value may be null.

Example Import File


1270.0, “LC”, “Fars. FM”, “Limestone”, “Very hard with occasional
sand.”
1320.5, “FT”, “Bunt. Sst FM”, “Sand”, ““
1560.0, “LC”, “Bunt. Sst FM”, “Anhydrite”, “Very hard. Heavy vibration
on drillstring.”
1745.0,”LC”, ““, “Coal”, “Large amount of pyrite nodules in cuttings”
1810.5, “LC”, “Bunt. sst FM”, “Sand”, “Medium to very hard. Some shale
in cuttings. Indications of pore pressure increase.”
2450.0, “FT”, “Bunt. Shl FM”, “Siltstone”, ““
2680.0, “LC”, ““, “Sandstone”, “Very fine and hard. Bit bouncing on
bottom.”
2810.0, “LC”, ““, “Granite”, “Basement reached”

9-14 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Geology Actual

Report
Report Dialog
The dialog box illustrated below is displayed when the Reports... button on
the main screen is clicked.

Figure 9-7 Geology


Actual Report Dialog
Box

This dialog provides a few simple controls over the range and dataset of the
report to be generated. The functionality of each of the display components
of the dialog is given in the following sections.

Special Features

Geology Data Set option menu


Allows selection of the geology dataset for the report. The default data set
is Definitive.

Depth From (MD) text field


Allows entry of the measured depth start of the report range. Default is the
measured depth of first geological section in current dataset.

Depth To (MD) text field


Allows entry of the measured depth end of the report range. Default is the
measured total depth value from the Morning Drilling Report, displayed on
the main screen.

Run Report button


Displays the standard DEAP report viewer window and generates the
report according to the selected parameters described above.

Cancel button
Returns control back to the main screen without running the report.

Help button
Displays the standard DEAP help book for the report dialog.

Reference Guide 9-15


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Geology Actual DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Sample Geology Actual Report

9-16 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Chapter 10

Drilling Fluid Actual

The drilling fluid actual application provides a means for


the contract mud engineer or company man at the well site
to report regularly on the properties of drilling mud and
workover/completion brine being used in oilfield drilling
operations. It comes within the area of daily operations, and
the data entered here will be reported in the morning reports
as well as in reports generated by this application. In
addition, the data entered here is accessed automatically by
the engineering and well planning applications.

Reference Guide 10-1


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Drilling Fluid Actual DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Overview
The system has been designed to allow for the expert user and the non-
expert user in the area of fluids. A limited amount of data is mandatory and
is data which would be clearly understood by all users. This mandatory
data includes such information as mud density, rheology and fluid loss.
The fact that only certain items of data are mandatory and the rest optional,
means that it is largely the user who decides what information to include in
the report, depending on the type of operation and the level of support
given to it by fluids specialists.
It is important to keep in mind that data entered here is automatically
accessed and loaded into the DEAP engineering applications, such as
hydraulics, swab and surge, drill string simulator, and the cement
placement simulator. The more complete the data that is entered in this
application, the better the results from the engineering and well planning
applications.
The general drilling fluids application user is provided with a number of
mud report forms allowing all mud data relevant to the particular drilling or
workover operation to be reported. These reports cover the four most
commonly used groups of oilfield drilling fluids (water-based mud, oil-
based mud, brine, and synthetic-based mud), and provide a breakdown of
costs resulting from drilling fluid maintenance.
Office-based personnel will be able to obtain two levels of information on
the properties of drilling mud and workover/completion brine — from the
morning drilling report which will contain minimal information but enough
to allow drilling superintendents and engineers to make a first pass, and
from the fluids actual reports themselves.
In sum, this application provides the following features:
• Availability of mud data to wellsite drilling personnel and drilling
support personnel
• Availability of mud data for drilling post-well analysis staff
• Automatic extraction of operations mud data from the database into
DEAP applications
• Conformity with standard oilfield practice of regularly reporting the
current state of the drilling fluid actually in use
• Regular reporting of all mud data relevant to a drilling/workover
operation
• Provision of costs breakdown resulting from the maintenance of
drilling fluids

10-2 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Drilling Fluid Actual

Navigation
Navigation within the application as a whole has been designed to be
uncomplicated with no long series of windows leading into other windows.
This is illustrated in the diagram above.
On all sub-application windows, a heading will be displayed, providing
details of the current rig and well, taken from user defaults, plus the report
number, and, on certain windows, the check number also.

Main
Reports
Window

Additional
Rheology Properties Chemistry Properties Hydraulics Concentrations

Add Item Add Item

Inventory

Solids
Usage Control Comments Costs Environmental

Add Item

Add Use
Product Inventory

Drilling Fluids
Report

Bulk Mud
Inventory Inventory Fluids Costs

Reference Guide 10-3


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Drilling Fluid Actual DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Application Main Window


This window forms the base point for access to the sub-applications within
the drilling fluid application. All users will have read access to the main
window and will therefore be able to select reports and display them. User
groups with full access privileges will have the ability to create new reports
and edit existing ones.
The window contains a display of the current rig and well (taken from user
defaults) followed by an area containing a number of buttons for selecting
the report number, fluid type, report times, etc., and fields for indicating the
names of the mud engineer and the company involved.

Figure 10-1
Main Window –
Water-based, oil-
based and
synthetic-based
muds

The layout of the lower left pane of the window depends on the fluid type
selected.
• In all cases this pane contains pop-up menu buttons for selecting the
check number and the source from which the fluid sample has been
taken, a time field and a flowline temp field.
• In the cases of oil-based mud, water-based mud, and synthetic-based
mud, this pane will also contain a pop-up menu button for selecting
whether or not the sample is a statutory sample, and a depth field for
entering the depth of the hole measured at the time the sample was
taken.
• In the case of brine, the chemistry button will be unselectable and
there will be a field for brine test temp.

10-4 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Drilling Fluid Actual

The window provides a series of buttons to allow selection of the sub-


applications accessible from the main window. These buttons are
RHEOLOGY…, PROPERTIES…, CHEMISTRY…, ADDN.PROP.…,
HYDRAULICS…, USAGE…, CONCENTRATIONS…, SOLIDS
CONTROL…, COMMENTS…, COSTS…, and ENVIRONMENTAL….
Since CHEMISTRY is not applicable to brine as a drilling fluid this button
is unselectable in the display when brine is the selected fluid type.

Figure 10-2
Main Window –
Brine

Special Features
COMPLETE button — pressing this button signifies that all data has been
entered for a particular report and that it is complete. Once the data has
been committed, the report becomes read only and no more amendments
may be made to it. The report may be uncommitted by a DEAP System
Administrator (DBA) allowing further amendments.
REPORTS–> calls a pop-up menu which provides the options COSTS…
and FLUIDS…, — each of these options will activate the standard report
generator, allowing the user to produce fluids reports (water-based mud,
oil-based mud, brine, and synthetic-based mud) and cost reports.

Rheology
This window is composed of three distinct sections: one section holding
fields for FLUID DENSITY, FUNNEL VISCOSITY and two radio buttons
— FANN and PV & YP. The selection made here, between these two
buttons, decides the contents of the lower left pane.

Reference Guide 10-5


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Drilling Fluid Actual DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

• If FANN has been selected, the pane will hold two fields in a scrolled
list — RPM and READING for recording the FANN readings at
various instrument revolution speeds.

Figure 10-3
Rheology
— FANN

• If PV & YP has been selected the pane will hold three fields — PV for
the plastic viscosity of the liquid, YP for the yield point of the liquid
and a YIELD STRESS field.
The lower right hand pane (for muds) will hold details for readings of
GELS — 10 SEC GELS, 10 MIN GELS AND 30 MIN GELS. This
pane will be blank for brine.

Figure 10-4
Rheology
— PV & YP
(Brine)

• If PV & YP is selected, the user may either enter values in the PV and
YP fields, in which case the n and K values will be derived from
these, or, alternatively, the user may enter values in the n and K fields,
in which case the PV and YP values will be derived from them.

10-6 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Drilling Fluid Actual

By default, the window will contain the pane for FANN readings when first
opened. When the user switches from one pane layout to the other, data
shown on the newly opened pane will display data derived from the
previous one.
For example the PV & YP data will be derived from the FANN readings
entered against 600 and 300 RPM, with YIELD STRESS being derived
from the low speed readings; the 600 and 300 RPM readings on the FANN
pane will be derived from the values manually entered against PV & YP.
For a new mud check, when FANN has been selected, the RPM entries for
600, 300, 200, 100, 6 and 3 will be provided as defaults, although no actual
readings will be provided against them and should be entered by the user.
Further speeds and readings may be added by the user.

Properties
Water-based, Oil-based and Synthetic-based Muds
This window displays commonly reported elements of water-based, oil-
based, and synthetic-based mud checks.
There are two main areas on this window, one holding fields for commonly
measured properties of drilling fluids and the other holding fields for fluid
loss and filter cake measurements from a mud check.

Figure 10-5
Properties
— Water-
based, Oil-
based, and
Synthetic-
based mud

The FLUID LOSS and FILTER CAKE fields, under the heading API, are
mandatory for water based muds. Only one cake reading may be taken at
the longer time period, i.e. 30 minutes.

Reference Guide 10-7


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Drilling Fluid Actual DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

The FLUID LOSS, FILTER CAKE and TEMPERATURE fields, under


the heading HTHP, display the measurements taken from a mud check
using a high temperature high pressure filter press — these are mandatory
fields for oil-based muds.

Brine
This window displays commonly reported elements of brine as a drilling
fluid. There is one main data entry area on this window, which contains
fields for OIL and SOLIDS percentages, TURBIDITY @ SUCTION
values, TURBIDITY @ FLOWLINE values and CRYSTALIZATION
POINT values.

Figure 10-6
Properties
— Brine

Chemistry
Water-based Muds
This window has one main data entry area and contains values recorded as
part of the chemical analysis carried out during a mud check. Items
included here are pH value, MBT value, Pf value, Mf value, Pm value,
content of CHLORIDES, CALCIUM, MAGNESIUM, CARBONATE,
BICARBONATE, KCL, GYPSUM and LIME.

10-8 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Drilling Fluid Actual

The pH and MBT values are mandatory and must be entered.

Figure 10-7
Chemistry
– Water-based
mud

Oil-based and Synthetic-based Muds


This window is basically the same for oil-based and synthetic-based mud.
Both windows consist of one main data entry section, containing fields for
the entry of values for OIL/WATER RATIO (or BASE FLUID/WATER
RATIO for synthetic-based mud), ESV, EXCESS LIME, AgNO3,
CHLORIDES, CALCIUM and MAGNESIUM.
All except CHLORIDES, CALCIUM and MAGNESIUM are mandatory.

Figure 10-8
Chemistry
– Oil-based mud

Reference Guide 10-9


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Drilling Fluid Actual DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Additional Properties
This window has been designed for maintaining information about tests
performed during a mud check but which do not form part of the standard
test. It contains one main data entry area in the form of a scrolling pane, in
which the user may add or delete monitored items.

Figure 10-9
Additional
Properties

Special features
ADD — this button brings up the additional properties add window for the
mud specified, in which you can either select an item to add to the
additional properties window using the pick list or you can use the NEW
button to activate the item to add text field and add a new item to the
additional properties window.
If you add an ITEM, selecting the UNITS becomes a mandatory action.

Figure 10-10
Additional
Properties
– Add item

10-10 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Drilling Fluid Actual

Hydraulics
The hydraulics window is used for the maintenance of information on the
hydraulic properties of drilling fluid while it is circulating and should be
used once per report. The layout of the window will remain the same for
water-based, oil-based, synthetic-based mud and brine.
The data displayed on this screen should be acquired from the hydraulics
calculator application and then manually entered into this window. The two
applications may be run at the same time by way of the applications
launcher.

Figure 10-11
Fluid
Hydraulics

Concentrations
The product concentrations window is intended to be a means of recording
details of the concentration of additives in the drilling fluid during the
reporting period. New concentrations may be introduced and others may be
deleted when required.
The window consists of one main area holding a list of products and their
concentrations. An ADD and a DELETE button have been included to
facilitate the maintenance of the list.

Reference Guide 10-11


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Drilling Fluid Actual DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

If no previous data exists for a report, this window is displayed with the
concentration fields empty but with product items and units taken from the
list used in the previous report.

Figure 10-12
Product
Concentrations

Special Features
The ADD button calls up an add mud product window for selecting mud
products from a pick list, a catalog or the mud additive inventory window
or for creating new entries using the NEW PRODUCT button. The
CONCENTRATION UNIT field is always mandatory on that window.

Figure 10-13
Concentrations
– Product additions

Usage
This window is used for recording data on drilling fluid usage for water-
based, oil-based and synthetic-based muds and brine over the reporting
period.

10-12 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Drilling Fluid Actual

It is sub-divided into two main columns, one containing fields for


recording gains and losses of circulating mud/brine volumes and the other
containing fields for recording the actual volumes of mud/brine in the
circulating system.

Figure 10-14 Fluids Usage – Water-based, oil-based, and synthetic-based muds

The window used for recording brine usage will not contain a field in the
losses section for separator; otherwise it is exactly the same as the window
used for tracking other mud types.
When the window opens, data for the current report will be displayed — if
there is no current data for the report the only fields to contain values will
be the starting volume, the final volume and section losses where the
display will show values for final volume and section losses from the
previous report. (A section is defined as a logical part of the life of a well,
e.g. drill 17-1/2” hole or complete well.)

Reference Guide 10-13


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Drilling Fluid Actual DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Solids Control
There are two main sections to this window, one which contains a scrolled
list of all shale shakers, the other to identify solids control equipment types.
Within the top section regarding shale shakers, in addition to the shaker
number, there are two distinct columns, one for first screen and the other
for lower screens.
When a shaker number and first shaker row is highlighted, the ADD and
DELETE buttons become selectable for amending the lower screens
column. The first screen column records details of the top screen of a set
used on the shaker; the lower screens column records details of one or
several additional screens which may be added to a shaker configuration.
When the window initially opens but there are no relevant details for the
current report, the equipment types present will be determined from the rig
initialization application.

Figure 10-15 Solids Control

Comments
This window has been provided to allow for the inclusion of general
comments upon the drilling fluids and the procedures carried out upon
them during the report period. It consists of a scrolled box where the user
may enter free-form text.

10-14 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Drilling Fluid Actual

Figure 10-16
Comments

Costs
Costs incurred through maintenance of the drilling fluid during the course
of the reporting period are reported by way of the costs window.
This window is divided into three distinct areas, one for costs in the form of
a scrolling spreadsheet, one for comments on materials cost and usage and
an area providing total figures for the current day, the previous day and the
sum of them both for engineering and chemicals.

Figure 10-17
Costs

Reference Guide 10-15


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Drilling Fluid Actual DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Special Features
The ADD button calls up an add materials window for selecting materials
from a pick list, a catalog or the mud inventory window, or for creating
new entries using the NEW PRODUCT button. The CONCENTRATION
UNIT field is always mandatory.

Figure 10-18
Costs
– Add materials

USE INVENTORY… calls up the functionality of the stock control


system, but is only available if the stock control system is in use at your site
and you have appropriate access. Used to ensure the updating of quantities
received, used or returned for an individual mud additive item.
REFRESH FROM INVENTORY… also calls up the functionality of the
stock control system, but is only available if the stock control system is in
use at your site and you have appropriate access.
Its main use is to allow users of the drilling fluid application to update the
usage and cost table automatically based upon the status of mud products
in the stock control application.
UPLOAD STOCK… only available for new well/programs and/or for the
first mud report, this button opens the stock items window, in which users
may select a well and program from which to copy the list of mud items
used in the costs window for the well and program selected into the costs
window for the current well/program.

Figure 10-19
Uploading Stock

10-16 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Drilling Fluid Actual

Environmental
Drilling fluid-related environmental tests undertaken and incidents that
occurred during the course of the reporting period are reported by way of
the environmental window.
Once items have been selected by means of the ADD window, the
environmental window will contain three distinct areas, one listing the tests
or incident type, another listing the value used in conducting or evaluating
the test or incident, and a third indicating the units in which the test or
incident was measured.

Figure 10-20
Environmental

Special Features
The ADD button calls up an environmental add window in which you can
select an item from a pick list, or create a new entry using the NEW button.
The value/list item option menu defines the label of the pick list button: it
will read either UNITS or LISTS, and your pick list options will change
accordingly. The LISTS option will allow you to select between Y/N and
Pass/Fail; the UNITS option will bring up the standard UNITS pick list.

Figure 10-21
Environmental
– Add

Reference Guide 10-17


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Drilling Fluid Actual DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Reports
Drilling Fluids Report

10-18 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Drilling Fluid Actual

Drilling Costs Report

Reference Guide 10-19


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Drilling Fluid Actual DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

•Notes•

10-20 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Chapter 11

Formation Integrity Test Report

This application is used to record and plot the results of


formation integrity tests (FIT). For tests in which leak-off is
observed, the user may select a leak-off point from the
graph of pressure versus volume and the application will
calculate the corresponding equivalent mud weight (EMW).
If no leak-off is observed, EMW is automatically calculated
from the last test pressure.

Reference Guide 11-1


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Formation Integrity Test Report DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Overview
The formation integrity test report application consists of three main
sections: well details, mud details and FIT results. The application provides
automatic calculation of EMW at FIT TVD, graphical display of FIT
results, automatic importing of daily well status and daily mud report data
when they are available.
EMW is calculated as follows (the value of the constant will depend on the
units system being used):

EMW = MW + FIT LIMIT X a constant


FIT DEPTH (TVD)

In addition to instantaneous pressure, the user can enter delay pressures to


enable more accurate leak-off prediction. This also aids the interpretation
of the formation’s consolidation and permeability characteristics.
When possible, the application will import data from the daily well status
report and the daily mud report. The user is free to modify and update the
details, should it be necessary. If such details are not available, data entry
must be completed manually.
The application operates on a copy of any data it draws from the daily well
status report or the daily mud report. So, if the user modifies well details or
mud details, the original data in the database will not be overwritten when
the report is saved.
Because the FIT report is a statutory document, the application offers
appropriately privileged users the option of committing the report to the
database in a read-only form. A committed report is no longer editable by
the user, but it can be reviewed whenever necessary. FIT reports can only
be committed when all of the FIT data has been entered, the FIT EMW and
FIT limit have been calculated, and the user has saved the report in the
database.

Navigation
The FIT report application consists of the main window, four data input
windows and a plot of the raw FIT data. Well details data is used mainly in
the header of the FIT report, while mud data is used in calculating the
equivalent mud weight for the test results window.

11-2 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Formation Integrity Test Report

Main
Window

Well Mud Test


Details Details Results

FIT
Data Graph

After completing the FIT data window, the user can instruct the application
to produce the pressure versus pumped volume graph. The user can select a
point on the plot, and the corresponding values will be used to calculate the
FIT EMW at the selected FIT limit — the value will be transferred to the
test results window.
The order in which the windows are completed is not important, but the
application cannot calculate EMW until virtually all of the data is present.
A FIT summary report can be requested via the main window.

Application Main Window


When the main window opens, the most recent FIT report for the default
well program will be loaded into the application.
The main window provides access to all of the data entry windows, except
for the test data window which is accessed via test results.
If new test data is to be entered, clicking the NEW TEST button sets the
TEST DATE to the current date and increments the FIT NUMBER by one.
The TEST DATE can be selected from the standard DEAP time and date
window if necessary. Earlier reports for the subject well can be reviewed
by choosing a FIT NUMBER from the pick list.
Well details, mud details and FIT results are accessed from the main
window by clicking on the appropriate icon. The user can have all of the
windows open at the same time if necessary.

Reference Guide 11-3


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Formation Integrity Test Report DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

The drilling superintendent, the expert user and the DBA have full access
to the functions offered by this application. The drilling supervisor has the
same access, but will not be able to delete and commit FIT reports. All
other users have read-only access.

Figure 11-1
Main window

Special features
DELETE — deletes the currently selected FIT report. This option is only
available for uncommitted reports, and only for users with appropriate
application access.
COMMIT — makes the current FIT report read only.

Well Details
If the current well status and casing job details are available from the
DEAP database, the application will insert them into the well details
window. The user is free to modify and update the details, as required. If
such details are not available, data entry must be completed manually.

11-4 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Formation Integrity Test Report

The values entered in this window must relate to the most recent casing
section set for the well.

Figure 11-2
Well details

Mud Details
If current mud details are available from the DEAP database, the
application will insert them into the mud details window. The user is free to
modify and update the details, should it be necessary. If such details are not
available, data entry must be completed manually.
The values entered in this window must relate to the mud currently in use
in the well.
Figure 11-3
Mud details

Fit Results
FIT results are entered via this window. Many of the text fields will default
to values entered elsewhere in the application, although all of them are
editable:

Reference Guide 11-5


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Formation Integrity Test Report DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

• FIT DEPTH (MD), FIT DEPTH (TVD), VOLUME LOST and


DELAY READINGS AFTER (interval) must be entered by the user
• TOTAL VOLUME PUMPED is taken from the last entry in the FIT
data table
The functions of the two text fields at the bottom of the window depend on
whether or not leak-off was observed during the FIT.
• If leak-off was not observed, the fields will be FIT LIMIT and FIT
LIMIT EMW
• If leak-off was observed, the fields will be LEAK-OFF LIMIT and
LEAK-OFF EMW
The selection between FIT limit values and leak-off values is made from
the LEAK-OFF OBSERVED pop-up menu on the window.
• FIT LIMIT (or LEAK-OFF LIMIT) is read off the FIT data graph
• FIT LIMIT EMW (or LEAK-OFF EMW) is derived from the FIT
LIMIT (or LEAK-OFF LIMIT) and from the MUD WEIGHT entered
in the mud details window
After entering FIT DEPTH MD and FIT DEPTH TVD, the user should
open the test data window and complete the table.
Once the test data has been applied, TOTAL VOLUME PUMPED will be
transferred to the test results window and the FIT graph will be available
for the selection of FIT LIMIT or LEAK-OFF LIMIT.

Figure 11-4
Test results

11-6 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Formation Integrity Test Report

Fit Data
This window is for the entry of raw FIT data. The table’s CUMULATIVE
VOLUME and INITIAL PRESSURE columns are always editable, but the
FINAL PRESSURE column only becomes editable if the user has entered
a time interval in the DELAY READING text field in the FIT results
window.
When the data is applied, the final CUMULATIVE VOLUME entry is
transferred to the test results window as TOTAL VOLUME PUMPED. If
no leak-off has been observed, the last initial pressure reading in the table
will be used as the FIT limit.

Figure 11-5
FIT data

Special features
INSERT ABOVE — inserts a line above the currently selected table entry.
DELETE — deletes the currently selected table entry.

Reference Guide 11-7


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Formation Integrity Test Report DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Fit Results Graph


The FIT results graph displays instantaneous pressure (solid line) and
delayed pressure (if values have been entered), plotted against pumped
volume. The graph will not be updated automatically if the user alters any
of the entered data; the window must be closed and then re-opened.

Figure 11-6
FIT results
graph

Special features
IN button — enables the user to define a rectangular area of the screen
which will be re-displayed at an enlarged scale.
OUT button — reduces the screen scaling back to its nominal value after it
has been enlarged by the IN command.
PAN button — enables the user to re-locate the center of a plot which has
been re-scaled by using the IN command.
WHERE? button — enables the user to select a point on the graph and read
its co-ordinates. If required, the pressure co-ordinate can be transferred to
the test results window for use in the calculation of an equivalent mud
weight.
This is only functional on the FIT results graph at its normal scale, but not
when the options IN or PAN have been used.

Figure 11-7
XY Where?
window

11-8 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Formation Integrity Test Report

Fit Report
The FIT report summarizes the well details, the mud details and the FIT
results. It also presents the table of raw FIT data and the leak-off graph.

Reference Guide 11-9


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Formation Integrity Test Report DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

•Notes•

11-10 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
dn
Chapter 12

Progress Log

The progress log application has been designed to provide a


means by which a drilling supervisor, or similarly
responsible person, may enter details of work carried out
during a previously defined time interval. The progress log
is a record of all activities carried out during the life of a
well program — such logging is carried out as a daily
operation within the DEAP system. It forms a central
element of the daily routine of drilling activities and is an
important part of the time recording and reporting system.

Reference Guide 12-1


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Progress Log DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Overview
The progress log comprises a series of daily log intervals, starting from the
initialization date and ending at well completion, at which stage the
progress log undergoes a validity check and is closed off. Each log is a
consecutive series of reports for a predefined reporting interval. Data
produced by way of the progress log application is linked to other
applications within the time recording and reporting system — phase and
job allocation and the morning report.
The phase and job allocation application is closely linked with the progress
log in that it allows office-based engineers to allocate phases and jobs to
tasks entered in the progress log.
The progress log application has been constructed such that almost all the
reporting may be carried out by selection from pick lists — minimizing the
need to enter free-form text yet giving sufficient detail for post-well
analysis. It is designed to be as flexible as possible, as regards the building
of the log. When the user runs the log checking procedure a warning will
be given if any modification is going to affect the integrity of other entries.
The order in which the user chooses to build the log is entirely optional, but
it is easier to build it in a strictly sequential manner rather than in random
order. Features of this application include:
• Configurable for operation on three separate reporting levels — task,
operation or event
• Three subject levels are supported — well program, rig program and
facility program
• Provides flexibility — time interval may be configured to suit
individual sites, e.g. 24 hour period or 12 hour period
• Allows for progress reporting on site preparation, drilling, workover
and completion
• Displays last point of entry as the re-entry point
• Has links with well development plan data
• Data generated by the application may be accessed by the job and
phase allocation application and by the morning report generator
When a log interval has been committed it is made available to the morning
report generator — after this point no data may be altered by the user
although it may still be examined within the progress log application.
In cases where a workover has to be carried out on a well, a new progress
log must be initialized.

12-2 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Progress Log

Note: If a user attempts to initialize a progress log without a


work program having already been initialized and given
a start date, a message box informing the user of this fact
will be displayed, referring the user to the DBA for
further assistance.

Navigation
Beyond the options available in the progress log main window, the
application is centered around the progress log editor, with only one other
major window called up from there — the activity selection window. In
this release of the software, all activity modification is carried out from one
large screen. This is intended to provide a more straightforward means of
modifying and selecting activities.
If screen space is available, the user may keep a number of windows open
at one time and does not have to close windows each time an entry has
been completed.

Main
Window

Initialize New Edit Log View Log Suspend Log End Log
Log Button Button Button Button Button

Initialization Progress Log


Window Editor Window Report

Activity New Report Check Log


Selection Window Period Window Button

Control of Access to the Log


Only one user should modify a particular log interval at any one time. If a
second user attempts access, a dialog box will be displayed warning that
the log interval is in use. The usual response to this must be the default
CANCEL option or two users will be working on the same data and
confusion may result.
This dialog box will also be displayed if the system has experienced a
power failure or other interruption. Such an interruption is the only time
when the user should select OK to continue.

Reference Guide 12-3


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Progress Log DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Definition of Terms

Object of interest
An asset area with geodetic boundaries and sub-surface targets.

Concept
An approach to exploit an object of interest.

Facility
A structure attached permanently to an object of interest for the purpose of
exploitation.

Design
The engineering requirements necessary to develop a concept.

Project program
The schedule of procedures required to implement designs necessary to
develop a concept. This will normally consist of a combination of phases of
development associated with the subjects required.

Phase
A set of activities which are carried out to achieve an objective. A phase
provides a gross view of activities required. A phase may apply at facility,
rig or well level. Typically several phases are incorporated within a
program and several jobs within a phase.

Job
A set of activities (tasks and operations) which are carried out as a standard
piece of work (e.g. drill hole, open hole, core hole, log hole, etc.) to achieve
an objective. Typically several jobs are incorporated within a phase and
several tasks within a job.

Task
A set of activities which are carried out to achieve an objective, e.g. anchor
rig, BHA run, run tubulars, subsea survey, repair. Typically several tasks
are incorporated within a job and several operations within a task.

12-4 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Progress Log

Operation
An activity or set of activities carried out to achieve an objective, e.g. pull
BHA, run tubulars, flow check, circulate, wash. Typically several
operations are incorporated within a task and several events within an
operation.

Event
An occurrence which alters (suspends, completes, aborts) the current
operation, e.g. at BHA, observed well static, had equipment failure, at
setting depth, stopped due to weather. It will by its nature define an
observation made, the assumed reason and/or response. Typically several
events are incorporated within an operation.

Progress log
The strictly sequential record of activities associated with a subject. Log
activities may be suspended and restarted a number of times during the life
of a subject.

Report interval
The interval selected for validation and distribution of reports. A report
period will have a start time (e.g. 0600) which will be set on a company
wide basis.

Rig
The derrick, drawworks and associated surface equipment of a drilling or
workover unit.

Subject
The well program, encompassing well, rig and facility, for which phase,
job, task, operation or event data will be collected.

Reference Guide 12-5


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Progress Log DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Sensitivity of Add Buttons


A certain sensitivity has been built in to the ADD buttons appearing on the
progress log window. The availability of these buttons is dependent partly
upon the reporting level set by the database administrator, and partly upon
choices made at the preceding level (the main window).
The table below gives an indication of what can be expected to be available
on-screen with each reporting level.
Reporting ADD TASK… ADD OPERATION… ADD EVENT…
Level Button Button Button
TASK Available Not Available Not Available
OPERATION Available Available Not Available
EVENT Available Available Available

In addition to the above sensitivity, when event level reporting has been set
and a task level activity is selected from the progress log, ADD EVENT…
will be unselectable since events may only be added to operations and not
to tasks. When an operation level or event level activity is selected, all
three buttons will be selectable.

Reporting Levels
There are three reporting levels which may be associated with a subject
(i.e. a well program):
• Task level
• Operation level
• Event level
The level may only be selected by a privileged user or system administrator
in the application setup. The amount of detail which needs to be entered is
dictated by the reporting level selected. The procedures used for all three
levels are very similar in order to facilitate data entry.
These reporting levels allow for different degrees of detail. Event level is
the most detailed level of reporting and requires the greatest investment of
time at the data entry stage but produces more in return by way of detail for
post well analysis. This is the recommended reporting level where
extensive post well analysis is required, with the benefits being most
apparent in the performance enquiry tool application.
It is important to remember that comments entered as free text cannot later
be queried, for example by the performance enquiry tool within the system,
whereas event qualifiers can be.

12-6 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Progress Log

Event level

Figure 12-1
Sample Report
— Event Level
Task

Operation

Free text comment

Event

Operation level

Figure 12-2
Sample Report
— Operation Level
Task

Operation

Free text comment

Reference Guide 12-7


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Progress Log DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Operation level reporting is suitable for sites where extensive post well
analysis is not required. The time saved entering data on site will be paid
for in a lower level of detail for analysis purposes. Selecting operation level
reporting implies acceptance of this limitation on the ability to analyze the
data.

Task level

Figure 12-3
Sample Report
— Task Level

Task

Task level reporting produces reports showing only a general view of


activities, giving little in the way of useful detail and only showing broad
durations of activities such as BHA runs, wireline work, subsea surveys,
etc. This might be useful for loading up partner reports or loading historical
well data.

12-8 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Progress Log

PHASES JOBS TASKS OPERATIONS EVENTS


BHA RUN 1
DRILL 36” HOLE
W.O.W
INSTALL RUN CONDUCTOR
CONDUCTOR INSTALL CMT CONDUCTOR
CONDUCTOR CLEAN OUT
RUN RISER
DRILL 17-1/2” PILOT
BHA RUN 2
HOLE
SIDETRACK 17-1/2”
SIDETRACK 17-1/2” HOLE
PILOT HOLE
DRILL 17-1/2” PILOT
BHA RUN 3
INSTALL HOLE
SURFACE U/R 26” HOLE BHA RUN 4
CASING
PULL RISER
RUN 18-5/8” CASING
INSTALL 18-5/8”
CMT 18-5/8” CASING
CASINGS
RUN RISER
REPAIRS
MAKE UP BHA BHA COMPLETED
BHA RUN 5 RIH AT OTHER POINTS IN WELL
DRILL CEMENT AT CASING SHOE
REPAIR RIG EQUIPMENT
REPAIRS EQUIPMENT WORK DONE
(MUD PUMPS)
DRILL 17-1/2” HOLE
DRILL REACHED PLANNED END
INSTALL BHA RUN 5 POOH AT CASING SHOE
INTERMEDIATE PULL BHA BHA COMPLETED
CASING REPAIR RIG EQUIPMENT
REPAIRS EQUIPMENT WORK DONE
(TOP DRIVE DOLLY RACK)
RIG UP RIG EQUIPMENT EQUIPMENT WORK DONE
RUN TUBULARS TO OTHER POINTS IN WELL
RUN 13-3/8” CASING
INSTALL 13-3/8” CASING CIRCULATE OBTAINED REQUIRED
FLUID PROPERTIES
CMT 13-3/8” CASING
BHA RUN 6
GCT SURVEY
DRILL 12-1/4” HOLE
BHA RUN 7
BHA RUN 8
SIDETRACK 12-1/4”
SIDETRACK 12-1/4” HOLE
HOLE
BHA RUN 9
BHA RUN 10
BHA RUN 11
INSTALL TEST BOPs
PRODUCTION
DRILL 12-1/4” HOLE REPAIRS
CASING
BHA RUN 12
REPAIRS
BHA RUN 13
BHA RUN 14
LOG HOLE
LOG 12-1/4” HOLE CLEAN OUT
LOG HOLE
RUN 9-5/8” CASING
INSTALL 9-5/8” CASING
CMT 9-5/8” CASING

Reference Guide 12-9


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Progress Log DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Application Main Window


This window will be displayed when the progress log is invoked from the
applications launcher. The buttons provided on this screen will allow the
user to perform the following:
• Initialize a new log
• Modify an open log
• View a log, closed or open
• Suspend a selected log, if all of its reporting periods have been
committed
• End a log which is currently open
In the central portion of the screen, all the logs for the current subject
(which will have been selected in the user defaults) are displayed in the
form of a scrolled list. The list shows the start and end dates, the status of
the log and the relevant program name.

Figure 12-1
Progress Log
Main Window

Progress Log Initialization


A log must be initialized when there are no active logs for the current
subject selection or when a subject change has been made and there are no
active logs for the new subject.
The log may be initialized for a facility only, or for a combination of
facility and rig or facility, rig and well.
Details of facility, rig and well are displayed on the progress log
initialization window for information purposes only, the user may only
enter details of the start date/time of the new progress log. The system will
default to the current date/time as the start date/time.

12-10 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Progress Log

Figure 12-2
Progress Log
Initialization Window

Editing a Log
The user must first select a log from the list in the main window in order to
be able to modify it. Logs which are marked CLOSED cannot be edited,
only viewed.

Viewing an Existing Log


The option to view a log is available from the progress log main window.
This allows the user to browse a current or a closed progress log but does
not allow amendments to be made.
None of the activity modification buttons will be available to the user when
the progress log editor is in view mode. Reports may be output using the
REPORT–> button.

Suspending a Log
This option is only available when the user highlights an open log on the
scrolled list.
The user may suspend a log whenever it is considered necessary. It is
conditional upon all log intervals within the progress log having been
committed. If this is not the case, a dialog box will be called up warning the
user that all intervals must be committed.

Ending a Log
This option is only available when the user highlights an open or a
suspended log on the scrolled list.
It allows the user to end a log for a particular subject conditional upon all
log intervals within that progress log having been committed, and invokes
a dialog box warning that if the user carries on, this action will prohibit any
further modifications to that progress log. The log will be given a status of
CLOSED on the scrolled list on the main window.

Reference Guide 12-11


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Progress Log DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Progress Log Editor


This window forms the hub of the progress log application. All activities
are presented in spreadsheet format. The procedures which are available
from this screen are:
• Selection of a progress log reporting period from a pick list
• Selection of the report view required from a pick list
• Browsing through all activities for a committed reporting period
• Activity management in an uncommitted reporting period
• Running an integrity check on the log interval
• Outputting log reports, either on the current period or the entire view

Figure 12-3 Progress Log Editor

12-12 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Progress Log

At the top of the editor window, the user is introduced to the concept of the
report view and the report period (accessible via pick list buttons), allowing
the user to view sections of the log which include more than just the current
report period. Only those activities falling within the current report period
will be active, however.

Report Period
The report period is the active period of the log which can be edited or
updated. There are a number of tools available to allow the user to select
the appropriate report period.
The navigation buttons to the right of the REPORT
PERIOD TO: field allow the user to move
Backwards Forwards backwards/forwards through the individual periods
or to move directly to the start/end of the log. The
pick list button will allow quick selection from a list
Start End
of all report periods for the current log.
The +/– magnifier buttons allow the report view to zoom in
on and out of the current period to the entire log. The
selected view will be displayed in read only mode in the Zoom
In Out
display field.
The end time and date of the selected report period will be displayed in the
REPORT PERIOD TO: data field, for information only.

Report View
This feature allows the extent of the log being displayed to be increased or
decreased from the current report period to the entire log.
More than the current report period may be viewed, but only the activities
within the current report period will be editable.
Any viewed rows of data which fall outside the current report period will
be read only. They will be displayed in a slightly darker background color.
The view options which are available on the pick list will be: CURRENT
PERIOD, LAST 24 HOURS, LAST 48 HOURS, LAST WEEK, ENTIRE
LOG.
The figure below illustrates the relationship between report view and report
period.

Reference Guide 12-13


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Progress Log DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Figure 12-4 Relationship between Reporting Period and View

PERIOD

VIEW

Starting a New Reporting Period


Selecting the NEW PERIOD… button will call up the new report selection
window. The displayed interval end date will default to the date/time of the
last log interval plus the length of the interval itself.
The user will be able to set the date to any date which suits the current
situation, but it should be noted that the system will reject all times other
than the designated start time for log intervals.

Figure 12-5
New Report Period

The Progress Log Spreadsheet


All of the activities within a log are displayed in the spreadsheet which
forms the central feature of the editor window. Various tools have been
included in the design of the window, to allow the user to customize the
display. Radio buttons are available for TASKS, OPERATIONS, EVENTS
and COMMENTS, to allow the user to control the level of detail displayed
in the spreadsheet.
The columns included in the spreadsheet can be controlled using the
COLUMNS–> button. The items included on the pop-up menu which is
displayed when this button is pressed are: CHECK/COMMIT STATUS,
DURATION, TIME TO, RIG RATE, ACTIVITY STATUS.
The default setting will be that the TIME/DATE FROM and ACTIVITY
DESCRIPTION fields will always be visible on the spreadsheet — they
cannot be toggled off.

12-14 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Progress Log

The TIME/DATE FROM column on the spreadsheet displays the start time
of the activity. The date will also be displayed, for reference, if the activity
is carried over from a previous period.
The ACTIVITY DESCRIPTION column displays a description
constructed from the activity type, its qualifiers and any comments which
have been inserted against it. If an activity is carried over from a previous
report period, the description will have a suffix of “cont…” — this will
apply to all activities which have a duration.
The CHK column shows the status of check/commit for the log. Color
coding is used here to indicate this status to the user.

Figure 12-6
Check/Commit Status Color
– Color Indicators
Unchecked Red

Checked but Half Red


Uncommitted Half Green
Checked and
Green
Committed

The end time of an activity is displayed in the TIME TO column. No end


time will be shown for an event type activity.
The DURATION field on the spreadsheet will display the activity’s
duration, in fractions of hours, if required. No duration will be displayed
for event type activities.
The RIG RATE toggle button will only be selectable on the COLUMNS –
> pop-up menu if rig rate reporting has been enabled by the database
administrator. On the spreadsheet, this column will indicate the rig rate for
the activity: DAILY, OPERATION, REPAIR or MOVE. Events will not
be given a rig rate.
The activity status column (STS) will provide a visual indication of the
start and end of specific activity types. Tasks are indicated by the marker
being positioned at the left of the STS field, operations in the middle and
events at the right

Modifying Activities
A series of buttons is located below the spreadsheet — ADD(INSERT)
TASK…, ADD(INSERT) OPERATION…, ADD(INSERT) EVENT…,
EDIT(VIEW) ACTIVITY… and DELETE ACTIVITY. The labels on the
buttons will depend on a number of factors.

Reference Guide 12-15


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Progress Log DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

The ADD labels will be changed to INSERT (i.e. INSERT TASK, etc.) if
the selected activity is not the last of that particular activity type in the log.
In addition, the label on the ADD OPERATION… button will change to
INSERT OPERATION…, if a task is currently selected and subsequent
operations exist for that task.
Inserting an activity within the log is only allowed if a suitable amount of
time is available between the selected activity and the one which follows.
When one of the ADD/INSERT buttons is selected, the activity selection
window, which the user may specify details of the tasks, operations and
events which are to be assigned to a particular activity in the log.

Checking and Committing Log Entries


The CHECK button below the spreadsheet on the editor window instructs
the system to check the log entries for inconsistencies such as time gaps
and missing activities.
Any errors which are found will be displayed in a message dialog box,
which can be left on-screen while the user fixes the discrepancies. The
CHK column on the spreadsheet will be appropriately updated when
CHECK has been run.
The user may highlight a checked entry on the log and then commit the
activity by pressing the COMMIT button. When a log entry has been
committed it is made available to the morning report generator — after
this, no data may be altered by the user, although it may still be viewed
within the progress log application.

Progress Log Reports


The REPORT–> button pops up a menu of two reports, one for a report of
progress log data in the current period and the other for a report of progress
log data for the entire view.
The current period report will contain details of all of the items within the
current report period, including a PROD column to flag N, when an
operation is non-productive. To make the effect of this more immediate, no
special flag will be used for productive operations.
The entire view report provides an output of all activities associated with
the currently selected view as well as those contained in the current report
period. The layout of this report will be similar to that of the current period
report, only the extent of its content will differ.

12-16 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Progress Log

Selecting Activities
The activity selection window is called up when the user presses one of the
add/insert or edit activity buttons on the progress log editor window.

Figure 12-7 Activity Selection Window

There are three panes within the window — one displaying task details,
one operation details and the third event details. Each of the panes contains
an appropriate ADD(INSERT) TASK/OPERATION/EVENT button —
these operate in the same way as the equivalent buttons on the progress log
editor window.
• In the TASKS and OPERATIONS panes, the following facilities are
available: a DATE field (read-only display), TIME TO and FROM
fields (via the standard DEAP date/time window) plus a STATUS and
a RATE option menu.
STATUS will always default to COMPLETED.
RATE will only be included if rig rate reporting has been turned on by
the database administrator.
• The EVENTS pane displays the DATE field but only contains one
TIME field, since only one point in time is applicable to events.

Reference Guide 12-17


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Progress Log DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Scrolled lists of appropriate activities are displayed in the main body of


each of these panes, with a section set aside for any qualifiers which may
be applicable to individual activities.
The activity selection lists allow the user to navigate between activities at
all levels. The system has been designed so that selecting an activity from
any of the lists will only display, in the other lists, activities which can be
associated with that selection
A field is provided at the bottom of each of the three panes on this window
for adding comments against each activity.

12-18 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Progress Log

Report

Reference Guide 12-19


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Progress Log DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

•Notes•

12-20 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Chapter 13

Progress Log Guidelines

This document was written for the January 1997 release of


DEAP v3.0 and was designed as a set of guidelines to
enable users to enter data into the DEAP Progress Log with
maximum efficiency while at the same time ensuring
maximum accuracy of records with respect to data
extraction applications that will utilize Progress Log data.
The document emphasizes the need for global consistency,
while recognizing that local preferences may be applied in
specific circumstances. In order to be able to cross reference
data among assets and sites it is important that the same rig
activities be reported in the same manner. By adhering to
the guidelines presented in this document, you will help
make this possible.

Reference Guide 13-1


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Progress Log Guidelines DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Overview
This document was written by Colin Hindson of Baker Hughes INTEQ in
Aberdeen and Oliver Whelehan of BP Technology Exploration in Sunbury.
The first part of the document provides the user with tips and tricks for
navigating the application, to enable maximum efficiency of wellsite user's
time.
The second part of the document consists of detailed guidelines of usage
for each of the thirty-four individual TASKS within DEAP to ensure
maximum consistency of reporting globally.
Detailed guidelines are offered for each TASK with examples of
commonly used OPERATIONS and rig activities. There are also examples
of associated activities NOT to be reported with in each TASK with the
correct reporting indicated.

Progress Log — Correct Usage

General
• Resize windows to useful working size.
• After finishing data entry, remember to SAVE then CHECK.
• Individual day's Progress Logs should be Committed 24 to 48 hours
after the particular date.
• NEW PERIOD starts the next day's Progress Log.

Tasks, Operations and Events


• A TASK MUST contain at least one OPERATION / EVENT pairing.
• An OPERATION is always followed by an EVENT where EVENT
level reporting is enabled.
If the OPERATION carries to the next report period then that is where
the EVENT is entered.

End Times and Tasks


• Do not put end times on TASKS.
• When a new TASK is added, its start time will put the correct end
time on the preceding TASK by default.
• The total time of a TASK must equal the sum of the contained
OPERATIONS.

13-2 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Progress Log Guidelines

End Times and Operations


• Always put an end time on an OPERATION — unless it carries to the
next report period.

Removing End Times


• To remove an end time from an TASK or OPERATION, highlight the
TASK or OPERATION, click edit and change the status from
Completed to Active.

Comments and Tasks


• It is best never to use comments on TASKS.

Comments and Operations


• Be careful not to put comments on an OPERATION, the meaning of
which is then duplicated by the following EVENT.

Deleting Tasks and Operations


• Deleting an OPERATION will delete its associated EVENT.
• Deleting a TASK will delete ALL associated OPERATIONS and
EVENTS.

Qualifiers
• QUALIFIERS are mandatory where requested.

Start and End Operations are often the same in different Tasks
• Many periods of rig activity start with either rigging up or rigging
down equipment.
If this is the case, and the activity took 15 or more minutes then report
it using OPERATIONS.
• DO NOT INCLUDE AS COMMENTS.

Break out time correctly


• Use individual OPERATIONs, not COMMENTS to break out
individual rig activities.
BP does provide for 15 minute time breakdowns where required to
fully report rig activity. Likewise, breakdowns of 45 min. or 1 hr 15
min. are acceptable.

Reference Guide 13-3


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Progress Log Guidelines DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

• NOT ACCEPTABLE

BHA Run No 1 Task


RIH Operation
M/U BHA, RIH, Circ BU Comments
On Bottom Event
Drill Operation

• SHOULD BE

BHA Run No 1 Task

Made up BHA Operation

BHA Completed Event

RIH Operation
On Bottom Event

Circulate Operation

Obtained Bottoms Up Event


Drill Operation

A Task may have other Tasks embedded within it


• BHA Run

BHA Run No 1

Perform Integrity Test (Leak-off test)


BHA Run No 1

Well Control (Kill a kick)


BHA Run No 1

• Run Tubulars

Run Tubulars - Casing

Cement
Run Tubulars - Casing (To rig down casing handling equipment)

• BHA Run

BHA Run No 2

Repair (Repair rig pumps)

BHA Run No 2
Suspend Operations (Wait on weather)

BHA Run No 2

• All the above TASKS would have their associated OPERATIONS


and EVENTS.

13-4 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Progress Log Guidelines

Tasks and their Qualifiers


Anchor Rig Page 6
BHA Run • BHA Run Number 7
BOP/Riser Operations • Subsea Equipment 9
Cement • Cement Job Purpose 10
Chemical Treatment 11
Coiled Tubing Run • Tubular OD 12
Commission Rig 13
Derrick management 14
Draw Down Test • Downhole Equipment 15
• DST String Type
Flow Well 16
Fluid System 17
Move Rig 18
Nipple Down BOP/Diverter • Well Control Equipment 19
Nipple Up BOP/Diverter • Well Control Equipment 20
Perform Integrity Test 21
Planned Maintenance 22
Pull Anchors 23
Pull Completion • Completion Type 24
• Tubular OD
Pull DST • DST String Type 25
• Tubular OD
Pull Tubulars • Tubular Strings 26
• Tubular OD
Repair 27
Run Completion • Completion Type 28
• Tubular OD
Run DST • DST String Type 29
• Tubular OD
Run Tubulars • Tubular Strings 30
• Tubular OD
Stuck Pipe • Tubular Strings 31
• Tubular OD
Subsea Survey 32
Suspend Operations 33
• Test Well Control Equipment 34
• Tow Rig 35
• Well Control 36
• Wellbore Survey 37
• Wellhead Work 38
• Wireline Work 39
• Workstring Run • Workstring Type 40

Reference Guide 13-5


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Progress Log Guidelines DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Task: Anchor Rig


Function
• To report all rig activity directly related to running anchors when
mobilizing a rig, re-running anchors that have slipped for any reason.
May also be used to report Pulling anchors when that rig activity is
part of mobilizing a rig or part of the re-deployment of an anchor that
has slipped.

Typical DEAP Operations Typical Rig Activities


• Ballast rig • All anchor handling related to mobilizing a rig
• Pretension anchors or re-deploying anchors that have slipped.
• Retrieve anchors • Running anchors, soaking anchors, running
piggybacks. Retrieving anchors to re-run
• Rig up..... while mobilizing.
• Rig down..... • Rigging up / down associated equipment
• Run anchors such as handing equipment.
• Soak anchors

Usage
• Typical appropriate usage includes the following:

Typical first Operation Typical end Event


• Rig up… • Anchor handling completed
• Run anchors • Equipment work completed
• Rig at required draught

Misusage
• Does not include the following possible associated activities that may
occur during mobilization or re-anchoring.

Activities Commonly Related to Anchor Rig Task to Use


• Seabed survey • Subsea surveys
• Rig / equipment repairs • Repair
• Wait on weather • Suspend operations

Pointers
• Used almost exclusively at the beginning of a well only.
• However, it would be used to report any anchor handling concerned
with re-running anchors at any time apart from demobilizing.
• Also used to report retrieving an anchor for the purposes of re-
deploying.

13-6 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Progress Log Guidelines

Task: BHA Run


Function
• To report all rig activity directly related to specific BHA runs.
Includes clean out, coring, drilling, E-log on drill pipe, fishing, kick-
off, LWD and milling assemblies. Also includes any directional
surveys taken with an assembly still in the hole.

Typical DEAP Operations Typical Rig Activities


• Circulate • All rig activity from the start to the end of a
• Core run, surface to surface, which relates to the
BHA in hole. Includes servicing drilling
• Download MWD tool equipment such as slipping and cutting
• Drill line, servicing top drives and pipe
• Flow check handlers.
• Make up BHA • Including tubular conveyed fishing
activities, but not wireline conveyed fished
• Open hole activities.
• Pull BHA • Rigging up / down associated equipment
• Pull out of hole such as handling equipment.
• Ream
• Run in hole
• Service rig equipment
• Take survey
• Underream
• Wash
• Work toolstring

Usage
• Typical appropriate usage includes the following:

Typical First Operation Typical End Event


• Make up BHA • BHA Broken Down

Misusage
• Does not include the following possible associated activities that may
occur while a BHA is in the hole:

Activities Commonly Related to BHA Run Task to Use


• BOP tests • Test well control equip.
• FIT / LOT • Perform integrity test
• Jar stuck pipe • Stuck pipe
• Pressure test casing • Perform integrity test
• Wireline conveyed fishing tools • Wireline work
• Rig / equipment repairs • Repair
• Wait on weather • Suspend operations

Reference Guide 13-7


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Progress Log Guidelines DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Pointers

Use of Suspend Operations


• Do not use the TASK Suspend Operations for unplanned/non-
productive time rig activity within a BHA run such as back reaming,
lost circulation or jar stuck pipe.
Loss and waste are flagged in the Phase & Job Allocation application.
Progress Log is designed to capture rig activity with loss and waste
applied to the reported activities via the Phase & Job Allocation
application.

Start and End Times


• Start and End Times of the BHA TASK must be identical to those
reported in the Bit/BHA Actual application.

How to report Tripping


• Tripping MUST be reported as follows

Make up BHA Operation

BHA completed Event

RIH Operation

Event

Etc.Etc. Operations

(Drilling, Circulating, etc.) Events


POOH Operation

At BHA Event
Pull BHA Operation

BHA broken down Event

13-8 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Progress Log Guidelines

Task: BOP/Riser Operations


Function
• To report all rig activity directly related to running and pulling BOPs /
risers on floating rigs.

Typical DEAP Operations Typical Rig Activities


• Pull marine riser • All marine riser OPERATIONs
• Rig down..... including latching BOPs and
disconnecting prior to wait on weather.
• Rig Up.....
• Rigging up / down associated
• Run marine riser equipment such as handling
• Test rig equipment equipment.

Usage
• Typical appropriate usage includes the following:

Typical First Operation Typical End Event


• Pull marine riser • BOP landed
• Rig up rig equipment • Completed operations
• Run marine riser • Connector latched and tested

Misusage
• Does not include the following possible associated activities that may
occur in relation to running or pulling marine riser:

Activities Commonly Related to


Task to Use
BOP/Riser Operations
• BOP tests • Test well control equipment
• Nippling down BOPs • Nipple down BOP/Divertor
• Nippling up BOPs • Nipple up BOP/Divertor
• Jetting Wellheads • Depends on why the wellhead is jetted
• Rig / equipment repairs • Repair
• Wait on weather • Suspend operations

Pointers
• Usually used twice in a well: after setting surface casing to run the
marine riser, and at the abandonment of a well to pull the riser to
demobilize.
This holds true unless repairs or wait on weather require unplanned
marine riser OPERATIONS.

Reference Guide 13-9


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Progress Log Guidelines DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Task: Cement
Function
• To report all rig activity directly related to pumping cement including
pre-job circulations once casing landed or circulating prior to plugs,
spacers and any waiting on cement Also includes jetting the wellhead
immediately after a cement job in order to clear suspected cement.

Typical DEAP Operations Typical Rig Activities


• Circulate • Rigging up and pressure testing
• Displace slurry cement lines. Conditioning mud.
Mixing, pumping and displacing
• Mix and pump slurry cement.
• Pump spacers • Rigging up / down associated
• Rig down..... equipment such as high pressure
• Rig up..... lines and cement heads.
• Test.....
• Wait on cement

Usage
• Typical appropriate usage includes the following:

Typical First Operation Typical End Event


• Circulate • Completed operations
• Mix and pump slurry • Plug bumped
• Pump spacers • Slurry at required depth
• Rig up rig equipment

Misusage
• Does not include the following possible associated activities that may
occur in relation to cementing.

Activities Commonly Related to Cement Task to Use


• Running / pulling cement stingers • Workstring run (NOT Run or Pull tubulars)
• Wash casing / liner • Run tubulars
• Wash stinger • Workstring run
• Rig / equipment repairs • Repair
• Wait on weather • Suspend OPERATIONs

Pointers
• When running cement stingers in order to set cement plugs use the
TASK Workstring Run to run and pull the stinger.
• Use the TASK Cement for circulating, spacers, slurries and
displacements directly concerned with setting the plug.

13-10 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Progress Log Guidelines

Task: Chemical Treatment


Function
• To report all rig activity directly related to down hole treatments
including pre-job circulations once the string is in position, spacers,
pre-flushes and any soaking time. Also includes any pressure testing
of equipment used in circulating / spotting the chemical treatment.

Typical DEAP Operations Typical Rig Activities


• Circulate • Acid jobs, injectivity tests,
• Displace treatment downhole treatments.
• Investigate pressure change • Rigging up / down associated
equipment such as surface lines,
• Mix and pump treatment high pressure lines.
• Perform acid job
• Perform injectivity test
• Preflush Pump spacer
• Rig down.....
• Rig up.....
• Soak

Usage
• Typical appropriate usage includes the following:

Typical First Operation Typical End Event


• Rig up rig equipment • Completed operations
• Test tubulars • Resumed operations
• Mix and pump treatment • displacement complete
• Pump spacers

Misusage
• Does not include the following possible associated activities that may
occur in relation to cementing:

Activities Commonly Related to Chemical Treatment Task to Use


• Running / pulling cement stingers • Workstring run (NOT Run or Pull tubulars)
• Rig / equipment repairs • Repair
• Wait on weather • Suspend OPERATIONs

Pointers
• When running a string in order to pump a chemical treatment use the
TASK Workstring Run to run and pull the string.

Reference Guide 13-11


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Progress Log Guidelines DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

• Use the TASK Chemical Treatment for circulating, pre-flushes,


pumping treatments and displacements directly concerned with the
particular chemical treatment.

Task: Coiled Tubing


Function
• To report all rig activity directly related to a coiled tubing run,
including tripping, rigging up and down coiled tubing units, and all in
hole activities.

Typical DEAP Operations Typical Rig Activities


• Circulate • All activities directly involved with
• Core coiled tubing from rigging up through
rigging down the unit. Includes,
• Drill drilling, fishing and production
• Fish phases.
• Flow well • Rigging up / down associated
• Function downhole tools equipment including spotting the
coiled tubing unit and
• Logging decommissioning the unit.
• Perform gas lift
• Pull coiled tubing
• Rig down.....
• Rig up.....
• Run coiled tubing
• Test.....

Usage
• Typical appropriate usage includes the following:

Typical First Operation Typical End Event


• Run coiled tubing • Completed operations

Misusage
• Does not include the following possible associated activities that may
occur in relation to coiled tubing:

Activities Commonly Related to Coiled Tubing Task to Use


• Rig / equipment repairs • Repair
• Wait on weather • Suspend operations

13-12 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Progress Log Guidelines

Pointers
• Used for all activities directly related to the coiled tubing run from
rigging up to rigging down the unit.

Task: Commission Rig


Function
• To report all rig activity directly related to rig commissioning, both as
a whole and for newly installed equipment.

Typical DEAP Operations Typical Rig Activities


• Commission rig equipment • Upgrading rigs with new equipment
• Test rig equipment • Rigging up / down associated equipment for the
purpose of commissioning new equipment

Usage
• Typical appropriate usage includes the following:

Typical First Operation Typical End Event


• Rig up rig equipment • Rig down…
• Commission rig equipment • Clear surface circulating equipment

Misusage
• Does not include the following possible associated activities that may
occur while commissioning equipment:

Activities Commonly Related to Commission Rig Task to Use


• Rig / equipment repairs • Repair
• Wait on weather • Suspend Operations

Pointers
• Does not include testing replacement parts after a repair.

Reference Guide 13-13


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Progress Log Guidelines DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Task: Derrick Management


Function
• To report all rig activity directly related to rig activity directly related
to handling tubulars in the derrick without tripping either in or out.

Typical DEAP Operations Typical Rig Activities


• Lay out BHA from derrick • Moving stands about the derrick.
• Lay out drill pipe from derrick Picking up and laying out
components from the derrick,
• Rack back drill pipe outwith a normal trip.
• Rack back tubulars (BHA

Usage
• Typical appropriate usage includes the following:

Typical First Operation Typical End Event


• Lay out… • Required components laid out
• Rack back… • Required components picked up

Misusage
• Does not include the following possible associated activities that may
occur while handling pipe:

Activities Commonly Related to Derrick Management Task to Use


• Lay out pipe while POOH • BHA Run
• Rack back casing shoe and float joints • Run tubulars
• Rack back pipe while WOW because cannot drill • Wait on weather
• Rig / equipment repairs • Repair
• Wait on weather • Suspend Operations

Pointers
• Use when handling pipe, but not RIH or POOH.

13-14 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Progress Log Guidelines

Task: Draw Down Test


Function
• To report all rig activity directly related to a draw down test from
starting the actual test to completing the test.

Typical DEAP Operations Typical Rig Activities


• Bleed down well • Observing wellbore pressure while
• Flow check inducing a flow for test purposes. All
activity while string is in place.
• Monitor pressures
• Rigging up / down associated
• Perform injectivity test equipment.
• Rig down.....
• Rig up.....
• Surge well
• Test.....

Usage
• Typical appropriate usage includes the following:

Typical First Operation Typical End Event


• Make up DST tools • Completed operations
• RIH

Misusage
• Does not include the following possible associated activities that may
occur during a draw down test:

Activities Commonly Related to Draw Down Test Task to Use


• Make up DST tools • Run DST
• Run in hole • Run DST
• Set packer • Run DST
• Rig / equipment repairs • Repair
• Wait on weather • Suspend OPERATIONs

Pointers
• Use for all rig activity directly related to the draw down test, from
having the string in place to commence the test to completing the test.

Reference Guide 13-15


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Progress Log Guidelines DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Task: Flow Well


Function
• To report all rig activity directly related to a flow period.

Typical DEAP Operations Typical Rig Activities


• Bleed down well • From first opening a well to the
• Flow well conclusion of the final shut in period
with respect to flowing, injecting and
• Inject to well shut in periods.
• Monitor well pressures

Usage
• Typical appropriate usage includes the following:

Typical First Operation Typical End Event


• Flow well • Closed in well
• Well stopped flowing
• Observed well static

Misusage
• Does not include the following possible associated activities that may
occur in relation to a flow period:

Activities Commonly Related to Flow Well Task to Use


• Pull out of hole • Run DST or Run Completion
• Run in hole • Run DST or Run Completion
• Set packers • Run DST or Run Completion
• Test..... • Run DST or Run Completion
• Rig / equipment repairs • Repair
• Wait on weather • Suspend OPERATIONs

Pointers

Start and End Times


• Start and end of this TASK are marked by what would be the actual
test period at the well site, not running or retrieving strings.

13-16 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Progress Log Guidelines

Task: Fluid System


Function
• To report all rig activity directly related to fluid system maintenance.

Typical DEAP Operations Typical Rig Activities


• Circulate • Filtering brine
• Fill pits • Loading / backloading whole mud
• Offload/backload boats • Circulating around the surface system only

Usage
• Typical appropriate usage includes the following:

Typical First Operation Typical End Event


• Fill pits • Completed operations
• Obtained required fluid properties

Misusage
• Does not include any down hole circulations APART from filtering
brine. Circulating down hole to condition mud is definitely not within
this TASK.

Activities Commonly Related to Fluid System Task to Use


• Circulating downhole • Dependent on why conditioning
• Kick/kill • Well Control
• Rig / equipment repairs • Repair
• Wait on weather • Suspend Operations

Pointers

Selecting the appropriate TASK


• If circulating downhole to condition mud think very carefully about
why the circulation is being done:
e.g. to condition for drilling: TASK — BHA run
e.g. to condition prior to cementing: TASK — Cement

Reference Guide 13-17


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Progress Log Guidelines DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Task: Move Rig


Function
• To report all rig activity directly related to moving the rig.

Typical DEAP Operations Typical Rig Activities


• Jack rig • All rig movement and derrick skidding,
• Move rig APART from towing. Includes moving
by tensioning and slacking off anchors.
• Offload / Backload boats Also includes jacking and ballasting.
• Rig down..... • Rigging up / down associated
• Rig up..... equipment.
• Skid rig

Usage
• Typical appropriate usage includes the following:

Typical First Operation Typical End Event


• Rig up… • At well location
• Move rig • Rig off station
• Skid rig

Misusage
• Does not include the following possible associated activities that may
occur in relation to moving or skidding:

Activities Commonly Related to Move Rig Task to Use


• Anchor handling • Anchor rig OR Pull anchors
• Towing • Tow rig
• Rig / equipment repairs • Repair
• Wait on weather • Suspend Operations

Pointers

Moving vs. Towing


• Do not confuse moving a rig with towing a rig.

13-18 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Progress Log Guidelines

Task: Nipple Down BOP/Diverter


Function
• To report all rig activity directly related to nippling down well control
equipment.

Typical DEAP Operations Typical Rig Activities


• Rig down..... • Nippling down well control equipment
• Rig up..... • Removing a diverter
• Test..... • Retrieving wear bushings for the purposes of
nippling down
• Rigging up / down associated equipment

Usage
• Typical appropriate usage includes the following:

Typical First Operation Typical End Event


• Rig up handling equipment • Equipment work completed
• Rig down…

Misusage
• Does not include the following possible associated activities that may
occur in relation to nippling down well control equipment:

Activities Commonly Related to Nipple Down BOP/Divertor Task to Use


• BOP tests • Test well control equipment
• Pulling or running marine riser • BOP / Riser Operations
• Rig / equipment repairs • Repair
• Wait on weather • Suspend Operations

Pointers
• Used to report all activity regarding hands-on work with nippling
down well control equipment.
Does NOT include running the equipment.

Reference Guide 13-19


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Progress Log Guidelines DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Task: Nipple Up BOP/Diverter


Function
• To report all rig activity directly related to nippling up well control
equipment.

Typical DEAP Operations Typical Rig Activities


• Rig down..... • Installing diverters, nippling up BOPs, function
• Rig up..... testing newly installed/nippled up equipment,
cutting casing to install BOPs.
• Test.....
• Rigging up / down associated equipment.

Usage
• Typical appropriate usage includes the following:

Typical First Operation Typical End Event


• Rig up … • Equipment work completed
• Function test completed satisfactorily
• Pressure test completed satisfactorily

Misusage
• Does not include the following possible associated activities that may
occur in relation to nippling up BOPs/diverters, but does not include
running the equipment:

Activities Commonly Related to Nipple Up BOP/Divertor Task to Use


• BOP tests • Test well control equipment
• Pulling or running marine riser • BOP / Riser OPERATIONs
• Rig / equipment repairs • Repair
• Wait on weather • Suspend OPERATIONs

Pointers
• Used to report all activity regarding hands-on work with nippling up
well control equipment.

13-20 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Progress Log Guidelines

Task: Perform Integrity Test


Function
• To report all rig activity directly related an integrity test.

Typical DEAP Operations Typical Rig Activities


• Circulate • Circulating prior to tests, casing
• Perform cement integrity test pressure tests, equipment
pressure tests, setting downhole
• Perform formation integrity test equipment for tests.
• Rig down..... • Rigging up / down associated
• Rig up..... equipment such as high pressure
• Test completion equipment lines.
• Test rig equipment
• Test sub-surface equipment
• Test tubulars

Usage
• Typical appropriate usage includes the following:

Typical First Operation Typical End Event


• Rig up … • Obtained leak off
• Circulate • Obtained required level of integrity
• Test … equipment

Misusage
• Does not include the following possible associated activities that may
occur in relation to pressure integrity tests:

Activities Commonly Related to Perform Integrity Test Task to Use


• Running or pulling strings • Dependent on string type
• BOP tests • Test well control equipment
• Drilling out casing shoes • BHA run
• Rig / equipment repairs • Repair
• Wait on weather • Suspend Operations

Pointers
• Do not use this TASK to run or pull strings.
Use the TASKS BHA Run or Workstring Run.

Reference Guide 13-21


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Progress Log Guidelines DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Task: Planned Maintenance


Function
• To report all rig activity directly related to maintenance defined on the
well program.
e.g. Annual inspection of rig

Typical DEAP Operations Typical Rig Activities


• Service rig equipment • Planned periods of shut down for maintenance
• Rigging up / down associated equipment

Usage
• Typical appropriate usage includes the following:

Typical First Operation Typical End Event


• Rig up … • Equipment work completed
• Function test completed satisfactorily
• Pressure test completed satisfactorily

Misusage
• Does not include the following possible associated activities that may
occur in relation to planned maintenance:

Activities Commonly Related to Planned Maintenance Task to Use


• Slip & cut drill line • Dependent on the activity in which the
• Service top drive service occurs
• Rig / equipment repairs • Repair
• Wait on weather • Suspend OPERATIONs

Pointers

If a regular maintenance task is NOT in the well program


• Where regular maintenance occurs — such as servicing drilling
equipment — that is not highlighted in the well program, the activity
should be reported in what ever TASK is occurring at the time.
e.g. If RIH with the TASK BHA Run and stop to slip & cut or service
rotary equipment, the service is reported within the TASK BHA Run.

Appropriate use
• THIS TASK IS NOT REQUIRED FOR REPORTING NORMAL
RIG ACTIVITIES.

13-22 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Progress Log Guidelines

Task: Pull Anchors


Function
• To report all rig activity directly related to pulling anchor.

Typical DEAP Operations Typical Rig Activities


• Ballast rig • Anchor handling when demobilizing a rig
• Retrieve anchors • All anchor handling related to de-mobilizing a rig
• Re-running anchors to finally pull while de-mobilizing
• Rigging up / down associated equipment such as
handing equipment

Usage
• Typical appropriate usage includes the following:

Typical First Operation Typical End Event


• Rig up … • Anchor handling completed
• Ballast rig
• Retrieve anchors

Misusage
• Does not include the following possible associated activities that may
occur in relation to pulling anchors:

Activities Commonly Related to Pull Anchor Task to Use


• Towing • Tow rig
• Moving • Move rig
• Rig / equipment repairs • Repair
• Wait on weather • Suspend Operations

Pointers
• Used almost exclusively at the end of a well only.
• Also used to report running an anchor for the purposes of eventually
retrieving all anchors.

Reference Guide 13-23


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Progress Log Guidelines DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Task: Pull Completion


Function
• To report all rig activity directly related to pulling out of hole with a
completion.

Typical DEAP Operations Typical Rig Activities


• Circulate • All rig activity directly related to
• Flow check pulling a completion
• Install tubular retrieval string • Includes any RIH during the
overall pulling of a completion
• Lay down tubulars
• Rigging up / down associated
• Pull tubulars in stands equipment such as handing
• Pull tubulars on retrieval string equipment
• Rig down.....
• Rig up.....

Usage
• Typical appropriate usage includes the following:

Typical First Operation Typical End Event


• Rig up … • Completed operations
• Pull …

Misusage
• Does not include the following possible associated activities that may
occur in relation to pulling completions:

Activities Commonly Related to Pull Completion Task to Use


• Bleed down well • Flow well or Well control
• Flow well • Flow well
• Rig / equipment repairs • Repair
• Wait on weather • Suspend Operations

Pointers
• If it is necessary to RIH a few joints for the purposes of eventually
POOH, it would be reported under this TASK NOT Run Completion.

13-24 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Progress Log Guidelines

Task: Pull DST


Function
• To report all rig activity directly related to pulling out of hole with a
DST string.

Typical DEAP Operations Typical Rig Activities


• Circulate • All rig activity directly related to
• Flow check pulling a DST string
• Lay down DST tools • Includes any RIH during the
overall pulling of a DST
• Lay down tubulars
• Rigging up / down associated
• Pull tubulars in stands equipment such as handing
• Pull tubulars on retrieval string equipment
• Rig down.....
• Rig up.....
• Work packer

Usage
• Typical appropriate usage includes the following:

Typical First Operation Typical End Event


• Rig up … • Completed operations
• POOH …

Misusage
• Does not include the following possible associated activities that may
occur in relation to pulling a DST string:

Activities Commonly Related to Pull DST Task to Use


• Bleed down well • Flow well or Well control
• Flow well • Flow well
• Rig / equipment repairs • Repair
• Wait on weather • Suspend Operations

Pointers
• If it is necessary to RIH a few joints for the purposes of eventually
POOH, it would be reported under this TASK NOT Run DST.

Reference Guide 13-25


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Progress Log Guidelines DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Task: Pull Tubulars


Function
• To report all rig activity directly related to pulling casing, tubing,
open ended drill pipe.

Typical DEAP Operations Typical Rig Activities


• Circulate • All rig activity directly related to
• Flow check pulling conductor, casing, liner or
open ended pipe
• Install tubular retrieval string
• Includes any RIH during the
• Lay down tubulars overall pulling of conductor,
• Pull tubulars in stands casing, liner, tubing or open
• Pull tubulars on retrieval string ended pipe
• Retrieve wellhead equipment • Rigging up / down associated
equipment such as handing
• Rig down..... equipment
• Rig up.....
• Work toolstring

Usage
• Typical appropriate usage includes the following:

Typical First Operation Typical End Event


• Rig up … • Completed operations
• Pull tubulars

Misusage
• Does not include the following possible associated activities that may
occur in relation to pulling tubulars:

Activities Commonly Related to Pull Tubulars Task to Use


• Pulling any workstrings • Workstring run
• Retrieving a casing landing string • Run tubulars
• Rig / equipment repairs • Repair
• Wait on weather • Suspend Operations

Pointers

String Types
• For the following string types use the TASK Workstring Run:
Acidization string, Cement stinger, Fracture string, Gravel pack
assembly, Packer assembly, Perforation assembly, Surge string.

13-26 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Progress Log Guidelines

Appropriate use
• If it is necessary to RIH a few joints for the purposes of eventually
POOH, it would be reported under this TASK NOT Run Tubulars.

Task: Repair
Function
• To report all rig activity directly related to repair down time, from the
instance the failure occurs to when the rig activity is back to the same
point immediately prior to the failure.

Typical DEAP Operations Typical Rig Activities


• Circulate • ALL RIG ACTIVITY FROM THE
• Flow check MOMENT OF THE EQUIPMENT
FAILURE TO WHEN NORMAL
• Lay down drill pipe OPERATIONS RE-COMMENCE AT
• Pull out of hole THE SAME POINT AS TO
• Pump out of hole IMMEDIATELY PRIOR TO THE
FAILURE
• Repair.....
• Rigging up / down associated
• Rig down..... equipment
• Rig up.....
• Run in hole
• Test.....
• Wash

Usage
• Typical appropriate usage includes the following:

Typical First Operation Typical End Event


• Pull out of hole • On bottom
• Repair … • Equipment work completed
• Function test completed satisfactorily
• Pressure test completed satisfactorily

Misusage
• Does not include the following possible associated activities that may
occur in relation to repairs:

Activities Commonly Related to Repair Task to Use


• Wait on weather • Suspend Operations

Reference Guide 13-27


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Progress Log Guidelines DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Pointers
• This TASK usually starts immediately after the EVENT Had
equipment failure.
The TASK Repair will cover the entire lost time period relating to the
equipment failure.

Task: Run Completion


Function
• To report all rig activity directly related to RIH a completion.

Typical DEAP Operations Typical Rig Activities


• Circulate • Retrieve tubular landing string • All rig activity
• Conduct slickline Operations • Retrieve wellhead equipment directly related to
running a
• Lay down tubulars • Rig down..... completion
• Perforate interval • Rig up..... • Includes any POOH
• Perform acid job • Run tubulars during the overall
• Perform frac job • Set packer running of a
completion
• Perform gravel pack • Space out tubulars
• Rigging up / down
• Perform injectivity test • Test..... associated
• Wash equipment such as
• Work Packer handing equipment

Usage
• Typical appropriate usage includes the following:

Typical First Operation Typical End Event


• Rig up … • Completed gravel pack
• RIH … • Set packer
• Function test completed satisfactorily
• Pressure test completed satisfactorily
• Interval perforated
• Guns failed

Misusage
• Does not include the following possible associated activities that may
occur in relation to running a completion:

Activities Commonly Related to Run Completion Task to Use


• Flowing a well • Flow well
• Rig / equipment repairs • Repair
• Wait on weather • Suspend Operations

13-28 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Progress Log Guidelines

Pointers
• If it is necessary to POOH a few joints for the purposes of eventually
RIH to setting depth, it would be reported under this TASK NOT Pull
Completion.

Task: Run DST


Function
• To report all rig activity directly related to run in hole a DST string.

Typical DEAP Operations Typical Rig Activities


• Circulate • Perform injectivity test • All rig activity directly
• Conduct slickline Operations • Retrieve wellhead related to running a
equipment DST
• Flow Check
• Rig down..... • Includes any POOH
• Make up DST tools during the overall
• Monitor well pressures • Rig up..... running of a DST
• Perforate interval • Run tubulars..... • Rigging up / down
• Perform acid job • Set packer associated
• Test..... equipment such as
• Perform frac job handing equipment
• Perform gravel pack • Wash
• Work packer

Usage
• Typical appropriate usage includes the following:

Typical First Operation Typical End Event


• Rig up … • Completed gravel pack
• RIH … • Set packer
• Function test completed satisfactorily
• Pressure test completed satisfactorily

Misusage
• Does not include the following possible associated activities that may
occur in relation to running a DST string:

Activities Commonly Related to Run DST Task to Use


• Flowing a well • Flow well
• Rig / equipment repairs • Repair
• Wait on weather • Suspend Operations

Reference Guide 13-29


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Progress Log Guidelines DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Pointers
• If it is necessary to POOH a few joints for the purposes of eventually
RIH to setting depth, it would be reported under this TASK NOT Pull
DST.

Task: Run Tubulars


Function
• To report all rig activity directly related to running conductor, casing,
liner, tubing, open ended drill pipe.

Typical DEAP Operations Typical Rig Activities


• Circulate • Rig down..... • All rig activity directly related to
• Flow check • Rig up..... running conductor, casing, liner,
tubing, open ended drill pipe,
• Lay down tubulars • Run tubulars including retrieving any landing
• Pull tubulars in stands • Run tubulars in stands strings
• Retrieve tubular landing • Run tubulars on landing • Includes any POOH during the
string string overall running of conductor,
• Retrieve wellhead • Set downhole equipment casing, liner, tubing, open
equipment ended drill pipe
• Test.....
• Rigging up / down associated
• Wash equipment such as handing
• Work toolstring equipment

Usage
• Typical appropriate usage includes the following:

Typical First Operation Typical End Event


• Rig up … • To other point in well
• Run tubulars • Hanger landed

Misusage
• Does not include the following possible associated activities that may
occur in relation to running tubulars:

Activities Commonly Related to Run Tubulars Task to Use


• BHA assemblies • BHA Run
• Workstrings • Workstring run
• Rig / equipment repairs • Repair
• Wait on weather • Suspend Operations

13-30 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Progress Log Guidelines

Pointers

Other strings
• For the following string types use the TASK Workstring Run:
Acidization string, Cement stinger, Fracture string, Gravel pack
assembly, Packer assembly, Perforation assembly, Surge string.

Appropriate use
• If it is necessary to POOH a few joints for the purposes of eventually
RIH, it would be reported under this TASK NOT Pull Tubulars.

Task: Stuck Pipe


Function
• To report all rig activity directly related to the stuck pipe incident.

Typical DEAP Operations Typical Rig Activities


• Circulate • Preflush • All rig activity from the
• Displace treatment • Prepare and fire cutting charge moment pipe initially
becomes stuck until either
• Flow check • Rest hole
Pipe comes free
• Jar stuck pipe • Reverse circulate
Pipe parts
• Mix and pump treatment • Rig down..... Pipe is backed off
• Monitor well pressures • Rig up..... Pipe is cut
• Perform acid job • Work packer
• Rigging up / down associated
• Perform injectivity test • Work stuck pipe equipment such as handing
• Work toolstring equipment.

Usage
• Typical appropriate usage includes the following:

Typical First Operation Typical End Event


Anything following these EVENTS:
• Got stuck while pipe stationary • Pipe came free
• Got stuck while pipe moving • Observed loss of string weight

Reference Guide 13-31


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Progress Log Guidelines DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Misusage
• Does not include the following possible associated activities that may
occur in relation to stuck pipe:

Activities Commonly Related to Stuck Pipe Task to Use


• Fishing • BHA run or wireline work
• POOH backed off / parted pipe • The TASK relating to the string that got stuck
• Rig / equipment repairs • Repair
• Wait on weather • Suspend Operations

Pointers
• Use this TASK to report all lost time relating to attempting to free
stuck pipe.
• Do not use it for retrieving backed off / parted strings or fishing.

Task: Subsea Survey


Function
• To report all rig activity directly related to a subsea survey.

Typical DEAP Operations Typical Rig Activities


• Conduct subsea survey • Pre-spud seabed inspection
• Pull subsea tools (divers, ROV, camera) • Rigging up / down associated
• Rig down..... equipment such as ROV or diving
equipment
• Rig up.....
• Run subsea tools (divers, ROV, camera)

Usage
• Typical appropriate usage includes the following:

Typical First Operation Typical End Event


• Rig up … • Completed operations
• Run subsea tools

13-32 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Progress Log Guidelines

Misusage
• Does not include the following possible associated activities that may
occur in relation to a subsea survey:

Activities Commonly Related to Subsea Survey Task to Use


• Observe casing stab into seabed • Run tubulars
• Rig / equipment repairs • Repair
• Wait on weather • Suspend Operations

Pointers
• Used for seabed inspections not for observing casing stabs or BOPs.

Task: Suspend Operations


Function
• To report all rig activity directly related to a complete shut down.

DEAP
Typical Rig Activities
Operations
• Rig Rig waiting on Weather: Rig waiting on Other Delays:
waited
• Weather • Anchor handlers • Materials
• Cranes shut down • Assessed situation • Offload/backload boats
• Electrical storm • Cranes • Orders
• Hurricane alert • Daylight • Permits
• Iceberg alert • Downhole fish • Production facilities
• Rig movement excessive • Drill crews • Service personnel
• Rig unable to stay on location • Engineering facilities • Standby boat
• Sandstorm • Equipment • Tide
• Unable to use standby vessel • Helicopter movements • Visibility
• Unable to work derrick • Junk
• Unsafe to continue

Usage
• Typical appropriate usage includes the following:

Typical First Operation Typical End Event


• Rig waited • Resume operations

Reference Guide 13-33


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Progress Log Guidelines DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Misusage
• Does not include the following possible activities that may be
interpreted as suspend operations:

Activities Related to Suspend Operations Task to Use


• Excessive reaming • BHA run
• Filling pits • Fluid system
• Pull to shoe for repairs • Repair
• Wiper trips for hole problems • BHA run
• Rig / equipment repairs • Repair

Pointers

Inappropriate use
• Do NOT use this TASK to report activity outside the planned
program, such as repairs or long periods of reaming — these RIG
ACTIVITIES must be reported in the CORRECT TASKS as outlined in
this manual.

Appropriate use
• Use this TASK only when there is no rig activity whatsoever due to
one of the above reasons — it is NOT to be used for deviations from
the drilling program when it may be considered that the program has
been Suspended.

Task: Test Well Control Equipment


Function
• To report all rig activity directly related to pressure testing or function
testing well control equipment.

Typical DEAP Operations Typical Rig Activities


• Install wellhead equipment • All pressure tests and function tests of well control equipment
• Retrieve wellhead except those resulting from a preceding repair
equipment • Running test plugs, all pressure and function tests
• Rig down..... • Includes retrieving wear bushings pulled for the test
• Rig up..... • Rigging up / down associated equipment such as handing
• Test..... equipment, high pressure lines

13-34 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Progress Log Guidelines

Usage
• Typical appropriate usage includes the following:

Typical First Operation Typical End Event


• Rig up … • Function test completed satisfactorily
• Pressure test completed satisfactorily

Misusage
• Does not include the following possible associated activities that may
occur in relation to testing well control equipment:

Activities Commonly Related to Test Well Control Equipment Task to Use


• Nipple down BOP • Nipple down BOP/diverter
• Nipple up BOP • Nipple up BOP/diverter
• Running or pulling BOPs • BOP/riser operations
• Test as a result of a repair • Repair
• Testing casing • Perform integrity test
• Rig / equipment repairs • Repair
• Wait on weather • Suspend OPERATIONs

Pointers
• Use only for scheduled well control equipment pressure or function
tests.

Task: Tow Rig


Function
• To report all rig activities directly related to towing a rig.

Typical DEAP Operations Typical Rig Activities


• Tow rig • The entire tow period

Usage
• Typical appropriate usage includes the following:

Typical First Operation Typical End Event


• Tow rig • At well location

Reference Guide 13-35


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Progress Log Guidelines DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Misusage
• Does not include the following possible associated activities that may
occur in relation to towing rigs:

Activities Commonly Related to Tow Rig Task to Use


• Anchor Operations • Anchor rig or Pull anchors
• Moving • Move rig
• Skidding • Move rig
• Rig / equipment repairs • Repair
• Wait on weather • Suspend Operations

Pointers

Tow vs. Move


• Do not confuse Tow and Move.
Tow involves a marine vessel with tow line attached to the rig.

Task: Well Control


Function
• To report all rig activity directly related to a kick / kill situation or
killing a producing well for purposes of re-entry / workover.

Typical DEAP Operations Typical Rig Activities


• Bleed down well • All rig activity from commencing
• Bullhead well to kill a closed in well to an
open, static well
• Circulate
• Circulate closed in well
• Circulate diverted well
• Flow check
• Investigate pressure change
• Lubricate well
• Monitor well pressures
• Reverse circulate
• Strip in to well
• Strip out of well

Usage
• Typical appropriate usage includes the following:

Typical First Operation Typical End Event


• Monitor well pressure • Observed well static

13-36 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Progress Log Guidelines

Misusage
• Does not include the following possible associated activities that may
occur in relation to a well kill or well control procedures:

Activities Commonly Related to Coiled Tubing Task to Use


• Slow circulation rates • Incorporate in what ever TASK is occurring
• Crew drills • Incorporate in what ever TASK is occurring
• Rig / equipment repairs • Repair
• Wait on weather • Suspend Operations

Task: Wellbore Survey


Function
• To report all rig activity directly related to directional surveys run on
wireline without pipe in the hole.

Typical DEAP Operations Typical Rig Activities


• Retrieve survey barrel • All activities from rigging up to
• Rig down..... rigging down the wireline survey
unit to run surveys without pipe in
• Rig up..... the hole — typically gyro runs
• Run in hole • Rigging up / down associated
• Take multi shot-w/line equipment such as slickline units,
• Take single shot-w/line sandlines

Usage
• Typical appropriate usage includes the following:

Typical First Operation Typical End Event


• Rig up … • Acceptable survey obtained
• RIH • No survey obtained
• Survey obtained outwith technical specification

Misusage
• Does not include the following directional survey activities:

Activities Commonly Related to Wellbore Survey Task to Use


• MWD survey • BHA run
• Totco on wireline inside drillpipe • BHA run
• Seabed surveys • Subsea survey
• Rig / equipment repairs • Repair
• Wait on weather • Suspend Operations

Reference Guide 13-37


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Progress Log Guidelines DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Pointers
• Usually only used for wireline convey surveys at casing points.

Task: Wellhead Work


Function
• To report all rig activity directly related to the wellhead for the sole
purpose of wellhead work.
Most commonly used when first installing the wellhead and then at
completions / workovers.

Typical DEAP Operations Typical Rig Activities


• Cut tubulars • Retrieve tubular landing string • All wellhead work when
• Install tubular retrieval string • Retrieve wellhead equipment the sole purpose is
related to the wellhead,
• Install wellhead equipment • Retrieve xmas tree equipment such as installing xmas
• Install xmas tree equipment • Rig down..... trees.
• Remove wellhead equipment • Rig up..... • Rigging up / down
• Remove xmas tree equipment • Set downhole equipment associated equipment
such as handing
• Test..... equipment.

Usage
• Typical appropriate usage includes the following:

Typical First Operation Typical End Event


• Rig up … • Equipment work completed
• Install …
• Remove …

Misusage
• Does not include the following possible associated activities that may
occur in relation to a wellhead work:

Activities Commonly Related to Wellhead Work Task to Use


• Jetting wellhead after cementing • Cement
• Nipple down BOP • Nipple down BOP/diverter
• Nipple up BOP • Nipple up BOP/diverter
• Retrieving wear bushings to run casing • Run tubulars
• Retrieving wear bushings prior to a BOP test • Test well control equipment
• Rig / equipment repairs • Repair
• Wait on weather • Suspend Operations

13-38 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Progress Log Guidelines

Pointers

Wear Bushings
• A common activity related to the wellhead is pulling and running
wear bushings.
If the bushings are pulled / ran for a specific purpose such as running
casing or BOP tests, then the activity of pulling / running the bushings
belongs to the related TASK.

Task: Wireline Work


Function
• To report all rig activity directly related wireline activity except
wireline conveyed directional surveys — see Wellbore Survey.

Typical DEAP Operations Typical Rig Activities


• Conduct braided cable operations • Formation logging, production
• Conduct slickline operations logging, cement bond log,
setting and retrieving tools or
• Fish equipment by wireline
• Perforate • Rigging up / down associated
• Perforate Interval equipment such as handing
• Prepare and fire cutting charge equipment, sheaves, downhole
tools
• Rig down.....
• Rig up.....
• Run electric logs
• Set downhole equipment
• Test.....

Usage
• Typical appropriate usage includes the following:

Typical First Operation Typical End Event


• Run coiled Rig up … • Completed run …
• Conduct braided cable operations
• Conduct slickline operations

Reference Guide 13-39


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Progress Log Guidelines DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Misusage
• Does not include the following possible associated activities that may
occur in relation to wireline activity:

Activities Commonly Related to Wireline Work Task to Use


• Directional surveys • Wellbore survey
• Rig / equipment repairs • Repair
• Wait on weather • Suspend Operations

Pointers
• Used for all wireline work except wireline conveyed directional tools.

Task: Workstring Run


Function
• To report all rig activity directly related to strings designed for a
specific job.

Typical DEAP
Typical Rig Activities
Operations
• Circulate Flow check • All rig activity concerning running and
• Perforate interval pulling workstrings to their depths of
operation for the following string types:
• Perform acid job
• Acidization string
• Perform frac job
• Cement stinger
• Perform gravel pack
• Fracture string
• Perform injectivity test
• Gravel pack assembly
• Pull out of hole
• Packer assembly
• Pull tubulars in stands
• Perforation assembly
• Reverse circulate
• Surge string
• Rig down.....
• Rigging up / down associated
• Rig up..... equipment such as handing equipment
• Run in hole
• Service rig equipment
• Set packer
• Test.....
• Wash
• Work toolstring

Usage
• Typical appropriate usage includes the following:

Typical First Operation Typical End Event


• Run tubulars • Sub-assembly laid out

13-40 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Progress Log Guidelines

Misusage
• Does not include the following string types or activities:

Activities Commonly Related to Workstring Run Task to Use


• Cementing • Cement
• Drilling assemblies • BHA run
• Open ended drillpipe • Run tubulars
• Casing • Run tubulars
• Rig / equipment repairs • Repair
• Wait on weather • Suspend Operations

Pointers
• Use only for the specified string types.

Reference Guide 13-41


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Progress Log Guidelines DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Appendix A: Tasks and Qualifiers


Task Qualifiers Task Qualifiers
Anchor rig Pull completion • Completion type
• Tubular OD
BHA run • BHA run number Pull DST • DST string type
• Tubular OD
BOP/riser operations • Subsea equipment Pull tubulars • Tubular strings
• Tubular OD
Cement • Cement job purpose Repair
Chemical treatment Run completion • Completion type
• Tubular OD
Coiled tubing run • Tubular OD Run DST • DST string type
• Tubular OD
Commission rig Run tubulars • Tubular strings
• Tubular OD
Derrick management Stuck pipe • Tubular strings
• Tubular OD
Draw down test • Downhole equipment Subsea survey
• DST string type
Flow well Suspend operations
Fluid system Test well control
equipment
Move rig Tow rig
Nipple down BOP/ • Well control Well control
diverter equipment

Nipple up BOP/diverter • Well control Wellbore survey


equipment
Perform integrity test Wellhead work
Planned maintenance Wireline work • Wireline type
Pull anchors Workstring run • Workstring type
• Tubular OD

13-42 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Progress Log Guidelines

Appendix B: Operations and Qualifiers


Operation Qualifiers Operation Qualifiers
Backflow Download MWD tool
Backream • Depth Drill • Depth
Ballast rig • Ballast Drill cement • Depth
• Draft
Batch mix slurry • Volume Drill installed equipment • Downhole equipment
Bleed down well Drop survey barrel • Survey instruments
BOP work • Well control Fill pits • Fluid types
Bullhead well Filter fluid • Fluid types
Check communication • Injection zone depth Fish • Depth
from
• Injection zone depth
to
• Observation zone
depth from
• Observation zone
depth to
Circulate • Depth Flow check
Circulate closed in well • Depth Flow well • Oil flow rate
• Water flow rate
• Gas flow rate
Circulate diverted well • Depth Freeze protect well • Fluid types
• Volume
Clear surface • Fluid system Function downhole • Depth
circulating equipment tools
Commission rig • Rig equipment Function rig equipment • Rig equipment
equipment
Conduct braided cable • Cable size Function subsea • Subsea equipment
operations equipment
Conduct coiled tubing Function sub-surface • Sub-surface
operations equipment equipment

Conduct electric cable Function Xmas tree • Xmas tree equipment


operations equipment
Conduct slickline • Reason slickline run Hold drill • Drill held
operations • Cable equipment
Conduct subsea survey • Subsea tools Hold pressure on • Maximum pressure
cement • Volume squeezed
Core • Depth Hold safety meeting
Cut tubulars • Tubular strings Inject packing
• Depth
Displace slurry • Volume Inject to well • Fluid types
Displace treatment Install rig equipment • Rig equipment

Reference Guide 13-43


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Progress Log Guidelines DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Operations and Qualifiers, continued


Operation Qualifiers Operation Qualifiers
Install subsea • Subsea equipment Logging (coiled tubing) • Completion type
equipment
Install sub-surface • Sub-surface Lubricate well
equipment equipment

Install tubular retrieval • Tubular strings Make up BHA • BHA run number
string
Install wellhead • Wellhead equipment Make up BHA in derrick
equipment
Install Xmas tree • Xmas tree equipment Make up DST tools • DST equipment
equipment
Install Xmas tree • Tubular strings Mill • Sub-surface
equipment on landing • Xmas tree equipment equipment
string • Depth
Investigate pressure Mix and pump slurry • Volume
change
Jack rig • Jacking height Mix and pump • Volume
treatment
Jar stuck pipe • Depth Monitor pressures
Jet wellhead Monitor wellbore
pressures
Lay down drill pipe • Tubular OD Move rig • % moved
• Length
Lay down DST tools • DST equipment Offload/backload boats
Lay down fish Open hole • Depth
• Hole size
Lay down tubulars • Tubular strings Operate camera • Tubular ID
• Length
Lay out BHA from Orientate/land tree
derrick
Lay out core • Core type Perforate
Lay out drill pipe from • Tubular OD Pull subsea tools • Subsea tools
derrick
Lay out tubulars from • Tubular strings Perforate interval • Top shot depth
derrick • Bottom shot depth
Log hole with LWD • LWD tool type Perform acid job • Flow rate
• From depth • Volume pumped
• To depth • Pump pressure
• Concentration %
• Injection zone depth
from
• Injection zone depth
to

13-44 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Progress Log Guidelines

Operations and Qualifiers, continued


Operation Qualifiers Operation Qualifiers
Perform cement Pumped slurry • Volume
integrity test
Perform formation RIH • Depth
integrity test
Perform FRAC job • Volume pumped Rack back drill pipe
• Pump pressure
Perform gas lift Rack back tubulars • Tubular strings
Perform gel squeeze • Ream • Depth
Perform gravel pack • Volume pumped Remove rig equipment • Rig equipment
• Pump pressure
• Screen out pressure
Perform injectivity test • Injection pressure Remove subsea • Subsea equipment
• Volume pumped equipment
Pile conductor • Depth Remove wellhead • Wellhead equipment
equipment
Preflush • Fluid types Remove xmas tree • Xmas tree equipment
equipment
Preload rig • Weight Repair downhole tools / • Downhole tools
equipment
Prepare & fire cutting • Depth Repair rig equipment • Rig equipment
charge
Prepare mouse/rat hole Repair subsea • Subsea equipment
equipment • Subsea tools
Pretension anchors • Tension Repair sub-surface • Sub-surface
equipment equipment

Pull BHA Repair surface • Surface equipment


equipment
Pull coiled tubing • Depth Repair wellhead • Wellhead equipment
equipment
Pull marine riser • Joints Repair Xmas tree • Xmas tree equipment
equipment
Pull out of hole • Depth Rest hole • Depth
Pull tubulars in stands • Tubular strings Retrieve anchors • Anchor type
• Depth
Pull tubulars on retrieval • Tubular strings Retrieve downhole • Downhole equipment
string • Depth equipment
Pump out of hole • Depth Retrieve sub-surface • Sub-surface
equipment equipment

Pump spacers • Fluid types Retrieve survey barrel • Survey instruments


• Volumes

Reference Guide 13-45


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Progress Log Guidelines DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Operations and Qualifiers, continued


Operation Qualifiers Operation Qualifiers
Retrieve tubular • Tubular strings Run coiled tubing • Depth
landing string
Retrieve wellhead • Wellhead equipment Run electric logs
equipment
Retrieve Xmas tree • Xmas tree equipment Run logs on tubulars •
equipment
Retrieve Xmas tree • Tubular strings Run marine riser • Joints
equipment on retrieval • Xmas tree equipment
string
Reverse circulate • Depth Run subsea tools • Subsea tools
Rig down rig equipment • Rig equipment Run tubulars • Tubular strings
• Depth
• Tubular OD
Rig down subsea • Subsea equipment Run tubulars in stands • Tubular strings
equipment • Depth
Rig down sub-surface • Sub-surface Run tubulars on • Tubular strings
equipment equipment landing string • Depth
Rig down survey • Survey instruments Service core barrel
instruments
Rig down wellhead • Wellhead equipment Service downhole • Downhole tools
equipment equipment
Rig down Xmas tree • Xmas tree equipment Service rig equipment • Rig equipment
equipment
Rig up rig equipment • Rig equipment Service subsea • Subsea equipment
equipment
Rig up subsea • Subsea equipment Service sub-surface • Sub-surface
equipment equipment equipment

Rig up sub-surface • Sub-surface Service wellhead • Wellhead equipment


equipment equipment equipment
Rig up survey • Survey instruments Service Xmas tree • Xmas tree equipment
instruments equipment
Rig up wellhead • Wellhead equipment Set downhole • Downhole equipment
equipment equipment • Depth
• Setting pressure
Rig up Xmas tree • Xmas tree equipment Set downhole
equipment equipment (wireline)
Rig waited • Reasons rigs wait Set packer • Packer depth
• Setting pressure
Run anchors • Anchor type Set tool face

13-46 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Progress Log Guidelines

Operations and Qualifiers, continued


Operation Qualifiers Operation Qualifiers
Single in drill pipe • Depth Test subsea equipment • Subsea equipment
Skid rig Test sub-surface • Control lines
control lines
Soak Test sub-surface • Sub-surface
equipment equipment
• Wellbore paths of
communication
Soak anchors Test surface equipment • Surface equipment
Space out tubulars Test tubulars • Tubular strings
Sting into downhole • Downhole equipment Test wellhead • Wellhead integral
equipment equipment components

Strip into well • From depth Test wireline unit • Wireline units
• To depth
Strip out of well • From depth Test xmas tree • Xmas tree integral
• To depth equipment components

Strip out over wireline • Depth Tow rig


Strip over wireline • Depth Underream • Depth
Surge well • Depth Wait on cement
• Volume surged
Take multishot-w/line • Survey instruments Wash • Depth
Take single shot-w/line • Survey instruments Wash over string • Depth
Take survey • Survey type Weld casing stub
• Depth
Test coiled tubing unit • Coiled tubing unit Work packer • Packer depth
Test completion • Completion Work stuck pipe • Depth
equipment equipment

Test DST tools • DST equipment Work toolstring • Depth


Test rig equipment • Rig equipment

Reference Guide 13-47


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Progress Log Guidelines DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Appendix C: Allocation of Operations to Tasks


Task Operation Operation
Anchor rig • Ballast rig • Retrieve anchors
• Hold drill • Rig down rig equipment
• Hold safety meeting • Rig up rig equipment
• Install rig equipment • Run anchors
• Move rig • Service rig equipment
• Offload/backload boats • Soak anchors
• Pretension anchors • Test rig equipment
• Remove rig equipment
BHA run • Backream • Pull out of hole
• Circulate • Pump out of hole
• Clear surface circulating equipment • RIH
• Core • Ream
• Cut tubulars • Remove rig equipment
• Download MWD tool • Rest hole
• Drill • Reverse circulate
• Drill cement • Rig down rig equipment
• Drill installed equipment • Rig up rig equipment
• Drop survey barrel • Run subsea tools
• Fish • Pull subsea tools
• Flow check • Service core barrel
• Function downhole tools • Service rig equipment
• Function sub-surface equipment • Service sub-surface equipment
• Hold drill • Set downhole equipment
• Hold safety meeting • Set tool face
• Install rig equipment • Single in drill pipe
• Investigate pressure change • Strip out over wireline
• Jar stuck pipe • Strip over wireline
• Lay down drill pipe • Take survey
• Lay down fish • Test rig equipment
• Lay out core • Test sub-surface equipment
• Log hole with LWD • Underream
• Make up BHA • Wash
• Mill • Wash over string
• Offload/backload boats • Work stuck pipe
• Open hole • Work toolstring
• Pull BHA
BOP/riser • Function subsea equipment • Rig down rig equipment
operations • Hold drill • Rig down subsea equipment
• Hold safety meeting • Rig up rig equipment
• Install rig equipment • Rig up subsea equipment
• Install subsea equipment • Run marine riser
• Move rig • Run subsea tools
• Pull marine riser • Service rig equipment
• Pull subsea tools • Service subsea equipment
• Remove rig equipment • Test rig equipment
• Remove subsea equipment • Test subsea equipment

13-48 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Progress Log Guidelines

Allocation of Operations to Tasks, continued


Task Operation Operation
Cement • Batch mix slurry • Pump spacers
• Circulate • Retrieve downhole equipment
• Clear surface circulating equipment • Reverse circulate
• Displace slurry • Rig down rig equipment
• Flow check • Rig up rig equipment
• Function sub-surface equipment • Run subsea tools
• Hold drill • Service rig equipment
• Hold pressure on cement • Test rig equipment
• Hold safety meeting • Test tubulars
• Investigate pressure change • Wait on cement
• Mix and pump slurry • Weld casing stub
• Pull subsea tools
Chemical • Backflow • Perform acid job
treatment • Circulate • Perform injectivity test
• Clear surface circulating equipment • Preflush
• Displace treatment • Pump spacers
• Flow check • Remove rig equipment
• Function rig equipment • Reverse circulate
• Hold drill • Rig down rig equipment
• Hold safety meeting • Rig up rig equipment
• Install rig equipment • Service rig equipment
• Investigate pressure change • Soak
• Mix and pump treatment • Test rig equipment
• Monitor pressures • Test surface equipment
• Monitor wellbore pressures • Test tubulars

Reference Guide 13-49


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Progress Log Guidelines DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Allocation of Operations to Tasks, continued


Task Operation Operation
Coiled • Backflow • Perform FRAC job
tubing run • Backream • Perform gas lift
• Batch mix slurry • Perform gel squeeze
• Bleed down well • Perform gravel pack
• Bullhead well • Perform injectivity test
• Circulate • Preflush
• Circulate closed in well • Pull coiled tubing
• Clear surface circulating equipment • Pump spacers
• Core • Pump out of hole
• Conduct coiled tubing operations • Ream
• Cut tubulars • Remove rig equipment
• Displace slurry • Remove wellhead equipment
• Displace treatment • Rest hole
• Drill • Retrieve sub-surface equipment
• Drill cement • Retrieve wellhead equipment
• Drill installed equipment • Reverse circulate
• Fish • Rig down rig equipment
• Flow check • Rig down sub-surface equipment
• Flow well • Rig down wellhead equipment
• Function downhole tools • Rig up rig equipment
• Function rig equipment • Rig up sub-surface equipment
• Function sub-surface equipment • Rig up wellhead equipment
• Hold drill • Run coiled tubing
• Hold safety meeting • Service sub-service equipment
• Install rig equipment • Service wellhead equipment
• Install sub-surface equipment • Set downhole equipment
• Install wellhead equipment • Set packer
• Investigate pressure change • Set tool face
• Lay down fish • Soak
• Lay out core • Space out tubulars
• Logging (coiled tubing) • Sting into downhole equipment
• Mill • Take survey
• Mix and pump slurry • Test coiled tubing unit
• Mix and pump treatment • Test rig equipment
• Monitor pressures • Test sub-surface equipment
• Monitor wellbore pressures • Test wellhead equipment
• Open hole • Underream
• Operate camera • Wait on cement
• Perforate • Wash
• Perforate interval • Work stuck pipe
• Perform acid job • Work toolstring
• Perform cement integrity test

13-50 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Progress Log Guidelines

Allocation of Operations to Tasks, continued


Task Operation Operation
Commission • Commission rig equipment • Rig down rig equipment
rig • Function rig equipment • Rig up rig equipment
• Hold drill • Remove rig equipment
• Hold safety meeting • Service rig equipment
• Install rig equipment • Test rig equipment
• Prepare mouse/rat hole
Derrick • Hold drill • Rack back drill pipe
management • Hold safety meeting • Rack back tubulars
• Install rig equipment • Remove rig equipment
• Lay down tubulars • Rig down rig equipment
• Lay out BHA from derrick • Rig up rig equipment
• Lay out drill pipe from derrick • Service rig equipment
• Layout tubulars from derrick • Test rig equipment
• Make up BHA in derrick
Draw down • Bleed down well • Pull tubulars in stands
test • Bullhead well • Remove rig equipment
• Circulate • Remove wellhead equipment
• Conduct braided cable operations • Retrieve sub-surface equipment
• Conduct electric cable operations • Retrieve wellhead equipment
• Conduct slickline operations • Reverse circulate
• Flow check • Rig down rig equipment
• Flow well • Rig down sub-surface equipment
• Function downhole tools • Rig down wellhead equipment
• Function rig equipment • Rig up rig equipment
• Function sub-surface equipment • Rig up sub-surface equipment
• Hold drill • Run tubulars
• Hold safety meeting • Run tubulars in stands
• Install rig equipment • Service rig equipment
• Install sub-surface equipment • Service sub-surface equipment
• Install wellhead equipment • Service wellhead equipment
• Investigate pressure change • Set packer
• Lay down DST tools • Surge well
• Lay down tubulars • Test DST tools
• Lubricate well • Test rig equipment
• Make up DST tools • Test sub-surface equipment
• Monitor pressures • Test wellhead equipment
• Monitor wellbore pressures • Wash
• Perform acid job • Work packer
• Perform FRAC job • Work stuck pipe
• Perform injectivity test • Work toolstring
• Pull out of hole

Reference Guide 13-51


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Progress Log Guidelines DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Allocation of Operations to Tasks, continued


Task Operation Operation
Flow well • Flow well • Inject to well
• Hold drill • Monitor wellbore pressures
• Hold safety meeting
Fluid • Circulate • Hold drill
system • Clear surface circulating equipment • Hold safety meeting
• Fill pits • Investigate pressure change
• Filter fluid • Reverse circulate
• Freeze protect well
Move rig • Ballast rig • Remove rig equipment
• Hold drill • Rig down rig equipment
• Hold safety meeting • Rig up rig equipment
• Install rig equipment • Rig waited
• Jack rig • Service rig equipment
• Move rig • Skid rig
• Offload/backload boats • Take survey
• Preload rig • Test rig equipment
• Prepare mouse/rat hole
Nipple • Bleed down well • Remove wellhead equipment
down BOP/ • Hold drill • Rig down rig equipment
diverter • Hold safety meeting • Rig down wellhead equipment
• Install rig equipment • Rig up rig equipment
• Install wellhead equipment • Rig up wellhead equipment
• Monitor pressures • Service rig equipment
• Monitor wellbore pressures • Test wellhead equipment
• Remove rig equipment
Nipple up • Hold drill • Rig down wellhead equipment
BOP/ • Hold safety meeting • Rig up rig equipment
diverter • Install rig equipment • Rig up wellhead equipment
• Install wellhead equipment • Service rig equipment
• Remove rig equipment • Test rig equipment
• Remove wellhead equipment • Test wellhead equipment
• Rig down rig equipment
Perform • Bleed down well • RIH
integrity • Check communication • Ream
test • Circulate • Remove rig equipment
• Clear surface circulating equipment • Reverse circulate
• Function sub-surface equipment • Rig down rig equipment
• Hold drill • Rig up rig equipment
• Hold safety meeting • Service rig equipment
• Install rig equipment • Set downhole equipment
• Investigate pressure change • Single in drill pipe
• Monitor pressures • Test completion equipment
• Monitor wellbore pressures • Test rig equipment
• Perform cement integrity test • Test sub-surface equipment
• Perform formation integrity test • Test tubulars
• Pull out of hole • Wash
• Pump out of hole

13-52 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Progress Log Guidelines

Allocation of Operations to Tasks, continued


Task Operation Operation
Planned • Commission rig equipment • Service subsea equipment
maintenance • Hold drill • Service sub-surface equipment
• Hold safety meeting • Service wellhead equipment
• Service downhole equipment • Test rig equipment
• Service rig equipment
Pull anchors • Ballast rig • Retrieve anchors
• Hold drill • Rig down rig equipment
• Hold safety meeting • Rig up rig equipment
• Install rig equipment • Run anchors
• Offload/backload boats • Service rig equipment
• Remove rig equipment • Test rig equipment
Pull • Bleed down well • Retrieve wellhead equipment
completion • Circulate • Reverse circulate
• Conduct braided cable operations • Rig down rig equipment
• Conduct electric cable operations • Rig down sub-surface equipment
• Conduct slickline operations • Rig down wellhead equipment
• Cut tubulars • Rig up rig equipment
• Flow check • Rig up sub-surface equipment
• Function rig equipment • Rig up wellhead equipment
• Function sub-surface equipment • Run tubulars
• Hold drill • Run tubulars in stands
• Hold safety meeting • Service rig equipment
• Install rig equipment • Service sub-surface equipment
• Install sub-surface equipment • Service wellhead equipment
• Install tubular retrieval string • Strip over wireline
• Install wellhead equipment • Test completion equipment
• Investigate pressure change • Test rig equipment
• Jet wellhead • Test sub-surface control lines
• Lay down tubulars • Test sub-surface equipment
• Monitor pressures • Test surface equipment
• Monitor wellbore pressures • Test wellhead equipment
• Prepare and fire cutting charge • Test wireline unit
• Pull tubulars in stands • Wash
• Pull tubulars on retrieval string • Work packer
• Remove rig equipment • Work stuck pipe
• Remove wellhead equipment • Work toolstring
• Retrieve sub-surface equipment

Reference Guide 13-53


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Progress Log Guidelines DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Allocation of Operations to Tasks, continued


Task Operation Operation
Pull DST • Bleed down well • Pull tubulars on retrieval string
• Bullhead well • Remove rig equipment
• Circulate • Remove wellhead equipment
• Conduct braided cable operations • Retrieve sub-surface equipment
• Conduct electric cable operations • Retrieve wellhead equipment
• Conduct slickline operations • Reverse circulate
• Flow check • Rig down rig equipment
• Flow well • Rig down sub-surface equipment
• Function downhole tools • Rig down wellhead equipment
• Function rig equipment • Rig up rig equipment
• Function sub-surface equipment • Rig up sub-surface equipment
• Hold drill • Rig up wellhead equipment
• Hold safety meeting • Run tubulars
• Install rig equipment • Run tubulars in stands
• Install sub-surface equipment • Service rig equipment
• Install tubular retrieval string • Service sub-surface equipment
• Install wellhead equipment • Service wellhead equipment
• Investigate pressure change • Strip over wireline
• Lay down DST tools • Test DST tools
• Lay down drill pipe • Test rig equipment
• Lay down tubulars • Test sub-surface control lines
• Lubricate well • Test sub-surface equipment
• Monitor pressures • Test wellhead equipment
• Monitor wellbore pressures • Wash
• Perforate • Work packer
• Perforate interval • Work stuck pipe
• Prepare and fire cutting charge • Work toolstring
• Pull tubulars in stands

13-54 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Progress Log Guidelines

Task Operation Operation


Pull tubulars • Circulate • Retrieve sub-surface equipment
• Clear surface circulating equipment • Retrieve wellhead equipment
• Conduct braided cable operations • Reverse circulate
• Conduct electric cable operations • Rig down rig equipment
• Conduct slickline operations • Rig down sub-surface equipment
• Flow check • Rig down wellhead equipment
• Function rig equipment • Rig up rig equipment
• Function sub-surface equipment • Rig up sub-surface equipment
• Hold drill • Rig up wellhead equipment
• Hold safety meeting • Run subsea tools
• Install rig equipment • Run tubulars
• Install sub-surface equipment • Run tubulars in stands
• Install tubular retrieval string • Service rig equipment
• Install wellhead equipment • Service sub-surface equipment
• Lay down drill pipe • Strip over wireline
• Lay down tubulars • Test rig equipment
• Pull subsea tools • Test sub-surface control lines
• Pull tubulars in stands • Test sub-surface equipment
• Pull tubulars on retrieval string • Test wellhead equipment
• Pump out of hole • Wash
• Remove rig equipment • Work stuck pipe
• Remove wellhead equipment • Work toolstring
Repair • Backream • Repair wellhead equipment
• Circulate • Repair Xmas tree equipment
• Clear surface circulating equipment • Reverse circulate
• Flow check • Rig down rig equipment
• Hold drill • Rig down wellhead equipment
• Hold safety meeting • Rig up rig equipment
• Investigate pressure change • Rig up wellhead equipment
• Lay down drill pipe • Run subsea tools
• Pull BHA • Single in drill pipe
• Pull out of hole • Test completion equipment
• Pull subsea tools • Test rig equipment
• Pump out of hole • Test subsea equipment
• RIH • Test sub-surface control lines
• Ream • Test surface equipment
• Repair downhole tools/equipment • Test wellhead equipment
• Repair rig equipment • Text Xmas tree equipment
• Repair subsea equipment • Wash
• Repair surface equipment

Reference Guide 13-55


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Progress Log Guidelines DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Allocation of Operations to Tasks, continued


Task Operation Operation
Run • Bleed down well • Reverse circulate
completion • Circulate • Rig down rig equipment
• Conduct braided cable operations • Rig down sub-surface equipment
• Conduct electric cable operations • Rig down wellhead equipment
• Conduct slickline operations • Rig up rig equipment
• Flow check • Rig up wellhead equipment
• Function rig equipment • Run tubulars
• Function sub-surface equipment • Run tubulars in stands
• Hold drill • Run tubulars on landing string
• Hold safety meeting • Service rig equipment
• Install rig equipment • Service sub-surface equipment
• Install sub-surface equipment • Service wellhead equipment
• Install wellhead equipment • Set downhole equipment
• Investigate pressure change • Set packer
• Lay down tubulars • Space out tubulars
• Monitor pressures • Sting into downhole equipment
• Monitor wellbore pressures • Surge well
• Perforate • Test completion equipment
• Perforate interval • Test rig equipment
• Perform acid job • Test sub-surface control lines
• Perform FRAC job • Test sub-surface equipment
• Perform gravel pack • Test surface equipment
• Perform injectivity test • Test tubulars
• Prepare and fire cutting charge • Test wellhead equipment
• Pull tubulars in stands • Test wireline unit
• Remove rig equipment • Wash
• Remove wellhead equipment • Work packer
• Retrieve sub-surface equipment • Work stuck pipe
• Retrieve tubular landing string • Work toolstring
• Retrieve wellhead equipment

13-56 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Progress Log Guidelines

Allocation of Operations to Tasks, continued


Task Operation Operation
Run DST • Bleed down well • Remove rig equipment
• Bullhead well • Remove wellhead equipment
• Circulate • Retrieve sub-surface equipment
• Conduct braided cable operations • Retrieve wellhead equipment
• Conduct electric cable operations • Reverse circulate
• Conduct slickline operations • Rig down rig equipment
• Flow check • Rig down sub-surface equipment
• Function downhole tools • Rig down wellhead equipment
• Function rig equipment • Rig up rig equipment
• Function sub-surface equipment • Rig up sub-surface equipment
• Hold drill • Rig up wellhead equipment
• Hold safety meeting • Run tubulars
• Install rig equipment • Run tubulars in stands
• Install sub-surface equipment • Run tubulars on landing string
• Install wellhead equipment • Service rig equipment
• Investigate pressure change • Service sub-surface equipment
• Lay down drill pipe • Service wellhead equipment
• Lay down tubulars • Set packer
• Lubricate well • Single in drill pipe
• Make up DST tools • Space out tubulars
• Monitor pressures • Sting into downhole equipment
• Monitor wellbore pressures • Surge well
• Perforate • Test DST tools
• Perforate interval • Test rig equipment
• Perform acid job • Test sub-surface control lines
• Perform FRAC job • Test sub-surface equipment
• Perform gravel pack • Test wellhead equipment
• Perform injectivity test • Wash
• Prepare and fire cutting charge • Work packer
• Pull tubulars in stands • Work stuck pipe
• Rack back tubulars • Work toolstring

Reference Guide 13-57


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Progress Log Guidelines DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Allocation of Operations to Tasks, continued


Task Operation Operation
Run • Circulate • Reverse circulate
Tubulars • Clear surface circulating equipment • Rig down rig equipment
• Conduct braided cable operations • Rig down sub-surface equipment
• Conduct electric cable operations • Rig down wellhead equipment
• Conduct slickline operations • Rig up rig equipment
• Flow check • Rig up sub-surface equipment
• Function rig equipment • Rig up wellhead equipment
• Function sub-surface equipment • Run subsea tools
• Hold drill • Run tubulars
• Hold safety meeting • Run tubulars in stands
• Install rig equipment • Run tubulars on landing string
• Install sub-surface equipment • Service rig equipment
• Install wellhead equipment • Service sub-surface equipment
• Lay down drill pipe • Set downhole equipment
• Lay down tubulars • Single in drill pipe
• Offload/backload boats • Space out tubulars
• Operate camera • String into downhole equipment
• Pile conductor • Strip over wireline
• Pull subsea tools • Test rig equipment
• Pull tubulars in stands • Test sub-surface control lines
• Rack back tubulars • Test sub-surface equipment
• Remove rig equipment • Test wellhead equipment
• Retrieve sub-surface equipment • Wash
• Remove wellhead equipment • Work stuck pipe
• Retrieve tubular landing string • Work toolstring
• Retrieve wellhead equipment
Stuck pipe • Backflow • Perform injectivity test
• Circulate • Preflush
• Clear surface circulating equipment • Prepare and fire cutting charge
• Conduct braided cable operations • Pull coiled tubing
• Conduct electric cable operations • Pull out of hole
• Conduct slickline operations • Pull tubulars in stands
• Cut tubulars • Pump out of hole
• Displace treatment • Pump spacers
• Fill pits • Ream
• Flow check • Rest hole
• Hold drill • Reverse circulate
• Hold safety meeting • Rig down rig equipment
• Investigate pressure change • Rig up rig equipment
• Jar stuck pipe • RIH
• Lay down drill pipe • Run coiled tubing
• Lay out core • Run electric logs
• Lay out tubulars from derrick • Service core barrel
• Mix and pump treatment • Single in drill pipe
• Monitor pressures • Test rig equipment
• Monitor wellbore pressures • Wash
• Perforate • Work packer
• Perforate interval • Work stuck pipe
• Perform acid job • Work toolstring

13-58 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Progress Log Guidelines

Allocation of Operations to Tasks, continued


Task Operation Operation
Subsea • Conduct subsea survey • Remove rig equipment
survey • Hold drill • Rig down rig equipment
• Hold safety meeting • Rig up rig equipment
• Install rig equipment • Run subsea tools
• Jet wellhead • Service rig equipment
• Pull subsea tools • Test rig equipment
Suspend • Backream • Pull out of hole
operations • Bullhead well • Pump out of hole
• Circulate • RIH
• Clear surface circulating equipment • Ream
• Flow check • Rig down rig equipment
• Function downhole tools • Rig up rig equipment
• Hold drill • Rig waited
• Hold safety meeting • Single in drill pipe
• Jar stuck pipe • Wash
• Move rig • Work stuck pipe
Test well • Circulate • Retrieve wellhead equipment
control • Function rig equipment • Rig down rig equipment
equipment • Function subsea equipment • Rig up rig equipment
• Hold drill • Service rig equipment
• Hold safety meeting • Service subsea equipment
• Install rig equipment • Service wellhead equipment
• Install wellhead equipment • Service Xmas tree equipment
• Investigate pressure change • Test rig equipment
• Jet wellhead • Test subsea equipment
• Monitor pressures • Test wellhead equipment
• Remove rig equipment • Test Xmas tree equipment
Tow rig • Hold drill • Tow rig
• Hold safety meeting
Well control • Bleed down well • Hold drill
• BOP work • Hold safety meeting
• Bullhead well • Investigate pressure change
• Circulate • Lubricate well
• Circulate closed in well • Monitor wellbore pressures
• Circulate diverted well • Reverse circulate
• Clear surface circulating equipment • Strip into well
• Flow check • Strip out of well

Reference Guide 13-59


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Progress Log Guidelines DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Allocation of Operations to Tasks, continued


Task Operation Operation
Wellbore • Circulate • Retrieve survey barrel
survey • Drop survey barrel • Reverse circulate
• Flow check • Rig down rig equipment
• Function rig equipment • Rig down survey instruments
• Hold drill • Rig up rig equipment
• Hold safety meeting • Rig up survey instruments
• Install rig equipment • Service rig equipment
• Pull out of hole • Take multishot-w/line
• Pump out of hole • Take single shot-w/line
• RIH • Test rig equipment
• Ream • Wash
• Remove rig equipment
Wellhead • Bleed down well • Remove wellhead equipment
work • Circulate • Remove Xmas tree equipment
• Cut tubulars • Retrieve tubular landing string
• Flow check • Retrieve wellhead equipment
• Function rig equipment • Retrieve Xmas tree equipment
• Function Xmas tree equipment • Retrieve Xmas tree equipment on
• Hold drill retrieval string
• Hold safety meeting • Rig down rig equipment
• Inject packing • Rig down wellhead equipment
• Install rig equipment • Rig down Xmas tree equipment
• Install tubular retrieval string • Rig up rig equipment
• Install wellhead equipment • Rig up wellhead equipment
• Install Xmas tree equipment • Rig up Xmas tree equipment
• Install Xmas tree equipment on landing • Run subsea tools
string • Set downhole equipment
• Investigate pressure change • Service rig equipment
• Jet wellhead • Service wellhead equipment
• Mill • Service Xmas tree equipment
• Monitor pressures • Test rig equipment
• Monitor wellbore pressures • Test wellhead equipment
• Orientate/land tree • Test Xmas tree equipment
• Pull subsea tools • Weld casing stub
• Remove rig equipment

13-60 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Progress Log Guidelines

Allocation of Operations to Tasks, continued


Task Operation Operation
Wireline • Bleed down well • Pump out of hole
work • Circulate • RIH
• Conduct braided cable operations • Remove rig equipment
• Conduct electric cable operations • Retrieve sub-surface equipment
• Conduct slickline operations • Reverse circulate
• Fish • Rig down rig equipment
• Flow check • Rig down sub-surface equipment
• Function rig equipment • Rig up rig equipment
• Function sub-surface equipment • Rig up sub-surface equipment
• Hold drill • Run logs on tubulars
• Hold safety meeting • Service rig equipment
• Install rig equipment • Service sub-surface equipment
• Install sub-surface equipment • Set downhole equipment (wireline)
• Jar stuck pipe • Single in drill pipe
• Lay down drill pipe • Test rig equipment
• Lay down fish • Test sub-surface equipment
• Operate camera • Test wireline unit
• Perforate • Wash
• Perforate interval • Work packer
• Prepare and fire cutting charge • Work stuck pipe
• Pull out of hole • Work toolstring

Reference Guide 13-61


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Progress Log Guidelines DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Allocation of Operations to Tasks, continued

Task Operation Operation


Workstring • Backflow • Pump spacers
run • Batch mix slurry • Remove rig equipment
• Bleed down well • Remove wellhead equipment
• Bullhead well • Retrieve sub-surface equipment
• Circulate • Retrieve wellhead equipment
• Clear surface circulating equipment • Reverse circulate
• Conduct braided cable operations • Rig down rig equipment
• Conduct electric cable operations • Rig down sub-surface equipment
• Conduct slickline operations • Rig down wellhead equipment
• Flow check • Rig up rig equipment
• Function rig equipment • Rig up sub-surface equipment
• Function sub-surface equipment • Rig up wellhead equipment
• Hold drill • Run tubulars
• Hold safety meeting • Run tubulars in stands
• Install rig equipment • Service rig equipment
• Install sub-surface equipment • Service sub-surface equipment
• Install wellhead equipment • Service wellhead equipment
• Investigate pressure change • Set packer
• Lay down drill pipe • Single in drill pipe
• Lay down tubulars • Soak
• Monitor pressures • Space out tubulars
• Monitor wellbore pressures • Sting into downhole equipment
• Perforate • Strip over wireline
• Perforate interval • Surge well
• Perform acid job • Test rig equipment
• Perform FRAC job • Test sub-surface equipment
• Perform gel squeeze • Test surface equipment
• Perform gravel pack • Test tubulars
• Perform injectivity test • Test wellhead equipment
• Preflush • Wash
• Prepare and fire cutting charge • Work packer
• Pull out of hole • Work stuck pipe
• Pull tubulars in stands • Work toolstring
• Pump out of hole

13-62 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Chapter 14

Cost Tracking

The cost tracking application provides a mechanism for


recording the costs incurred in the drilling and production
phases of a well. Cost tracking can be performed on a daily,
weekly, monthly, phase or job basis. This application offers
the following features:

• Total daily cost calculation


• Cumulative cost calculation
• Cumulative completion cost
• Cumulative well cost
• Changes to early sheets ripple through to later ones
• Costs can be entered in local currency
• Exchange rate can be adjusted from day to day

Reference Guide 14-1


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Cost Tracking DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Overview
DEAP’s cost tracking application records the costs that are incurred during
the drilling and completion operations associated with a particular well.
Costs can be allocated according to a phase or job, or recorded on a daily,
weekly or monthly basis. Users in the office are not constrained to using
the same costs basis as the drilling supervisor on the rig will be using.

Estimated and actual costs


Costs entered into the system might not be final invoice costs, as the
application is intended to record the costs from field tickets. Some of these
will only be estimates, so actual costs will remain the responsibility of the
accounting department.
The user can take account of field credits and cost reductions either by
entering negative cost values in the current sheet or by editing the values
entered in earlier sheets.
ROCs can assign their own local accounting codes to each of the cost
tracking categories; they will be set up by the DBA or by an expert user.

Access to cost tracking data


The information recorded by the cost tracking application can be accessed
by those responsible for accounting, but the application itself should not be
regarded as an accounting tool.
Planning applications will be able to access the information, for use in
estimates of future well costs and AFEs.

Cost tracking functions


Cost tracking will calculate total daily costs, cumulative costs for all of the
predefined cost categories and cumulative drilling and completion costs.
If costs have been recorded on a daily basis, the application can supply the
morning drilling report with daily cost data. Otherwise, daily costs must be
entered into the report manually.

Currency conversion rates


Costs will be stored in the DEAP database in US dollars, but they can be
entered in any local currency as long as the user also supplies a currency
conversion rate.
The user is responsible for updating the conversion rate whenever it
changes.

14-2 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Cost Tracking

Historical data
The current cost tracking sheet imports data automatically from the
previous sheet. This means that only a few entries and comments will need
to be typed each day, thus saving the drilling supervisor a considerable
amount of time.
In addition to carrying data forward from one day to the next, the
application enables the user to go back to examine, print and edit previous
cost sheets. Any changes will be reflected in the cumulative totals of the
succeeding sheets and in the current well cost figures.

Application Main Window


All activity in the cost tracking application takes place in the main window.
The upper sections of the window display the subject and the date of the
currently displayed cost sheet and the currency exchange rate.

Figure 14-1
Main
Window

The window’s middle section displays a scrolled list of all of the cost
categories applicable to the selected programme, their associated local
accounting codes, daily costs, cumulative costs and a field which indicates
whether a comment has been made about a particular category.
The lower third of the window displays the daily cost and cumulative cost
totals, comments on the selected category and several option buttons which
allow the user to move through the cost sheets, add a new cost sheet and
generate reports.

Reference Guide 14-3


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Cost Tracking DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

When the user clicks on NEW a new sheet will be generated. If operations
mode is ON, the sheet will be given the current system date. If operations
mode is OFF, the sheet will be given the date of the day after the date of the
most recent sheet. The user can change this date via the DATE button.

Special features
AFE NO: (authorisation for expenditure number) — this number is
imported from the programme initialisation application.
LOCAL CURRENCY text field — this setting is normally copied
automatically from the programme initialisation application.
DISPLAY pop-up menu — selects whether the display should be in local
currency or US dollars.
EXCH RATE: text field — specifies the exchange rate between US dollars
and the local currency or vice versa.
EXCHANGE RATE SELECTION pop-up menu — specifies whether the
displayed exchange rate should be from local currency to US dollars or
from US dollars to local currency.
PREVIOUS and NEXT buttons — move backwards and forwards through
the cost sheets for the current rig and programme.
NEW — start a new cost sheet.
REPORT… — print the current sheet for the current programme.
CATEGORY COMMENT: — free text entry field for comments on the
selected category.

14-4 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Cost Tracking

Report Window

Reference Guide 14-5


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Cost Tracking DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

•Notes•

14-6 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
ll
Chapter 15

Stock Control

This application offer significant time savings, improved


planning, definitive lists of available equipment and
supplies, reductions in the downtime caused by shortages,
automatic inventory updates from other applications,
comprehensive reporting facilities, automatic inventory
sorting by ownership and item type, and support for several
other DEAP applications.

Reference Guide 15-1


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Stock Control DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Overview
For the stock control application, inventory is split into eleven categories
(including the ship list). Each is accessible via a pick list on the main
window. Three options enable the user to add a new item to the inventory,
edit the details of an existing item or adjust the stock level of an item. The
edit item details windows have been designed so that only six are required
to edit all of the categories.

Navigation

Main
Window Reports

Edit Item Adjust Item


Catalog Details Stock
(Adjust
Existing
Stock)

Adjust Item
Stock
(Receive
New Stock)

Application Main Window


The main window displays the selected inventory in tabular form and gives
access to the other inventory categories via a pick list. Three further
options enable the user to edit aspects of the inventory: NEW ITEM, EDIT
ITEM and ADJUST STOCK. If the stock control system is invoked by
another application, some of these options may not be available.
If the application has been invoked from the application launcher, rather
than via another application, the main window will be empty when it first
opens. Otherwise, the window will open displaying an inventory relevant
to the calling application.

15-2 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Stock Control

Figure15-1
Main
Window

Special features
REPORT… — opens the report inventory window
NEW ITEM… — opens the add inventory item and edit item windows
EDIT ITEM… — opens the appropriate editing window
ADJUST STOCK… — opens the stock level adjustment window
RETURN SHIPPING INVENTORY… — removes all items on the ship
list from the inventory system. This option is only available while the ship
list is being displayed.
MULTIPLE SELECTIONS — the main window allows several items to be
selected simultaneously by clicking anywhere in the descriptive text area.

Select Item Type


This window is used in conjunction with the edit item window to select a
group of items within a category. When a group is composed of a number
of sub-groups, a pick list will appear so that the selection can be refined
further.

Reference Guide 15-3


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Stock Control DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Figure 15-2
Typical Select Item
Type Window
Drillstring
Components

After ITEM TYPE and, if appropriate, sub-type have been selected, the
choice of the item itself is made from a catalog in the edit item window.

Figure 15-3 Typical


Select Item Type
sub-window
Bit Types

Edit Item Windows


Bit Inventory
This window enables the user to enter and edit the inventory details for
drill bits, hole openers, coreheads and under-reamers. It is also used in
conjunction with the select item type window and a catalog to select new
items for inclusion in the inventory.

15-4 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Stock Control

.
Figure 15-4
Edit Item
Bit Inventory

Special features (for all edit item windows)


CATALOG — can be refined by entering details of the manufacturer and
the item’s size, then only matching items will be listed.
COPY — copy the details of the current bit into a new record; open the
new record for editing.
NEW ITEM — clear the window for new data entry.
CLASS (pick list) — invokes the select item type window.

Consumables and Additives


This window enables the user to edit the inventory details for consumable
materials after an item type has been selected. Some of the text fields
become either editable or non-editable depending on the material.
The key items are manufacturer and brand name; one or both can be
entered, or they can be omitted entirely.

Reference Guide 15-5


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Stock Control DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Figure 15-5
Edit Item
Consumable
Materials

Drill Strings and Components


The edit item windows for these inventory types differ only in a few minor
respects. The key items are serial number, manufacturer and outside
diameter; they can be entered in any combination or omitted entirely.

Figure 15-6
Typical Edit
Item Window

15-6 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Stock Control

Editing Inventory Details


The following table indicates the text fields which should be inspected and
updated as necessary

DP/Casing/ Motors/
Stabilizers Others
Tubing Subs
SERIAL NO * * * *
MANUFACTURER * * * *
MODEL * * * *
OD * * * *
ID * * * *
FISH NK OD * * * *
TOOL JNT OD *
TOOL JNT ID *
LENGTH * * * *
WT/LEN * * * *
FISH NK LEN * * * *
TOOL JNT LEN *
BLADE OD *
BLADE LEN *
DIST BELOW BLADES *
CUM DIST * * * *
ROT HRS * * * *
BENT SUB/MOTOR ANGLE *

Adjusting Stock Levels


This window enables the user to make adjustments to the stock levels of
the components and materials on the rig. The details of stock adjustments
can be entered either in advance or retrospectively by selecting the required
date from the standard DEAP time and date window.

Figure 15-7
Typical Adjust
Inventory Stock
Window

Reference Guide 15-7


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Stock Control DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Special feature
ADJUSTMENT QUANTITY — this field will not appear for uniquely
serially numbered items like drill bits.

Reports
This window provides the user with various reporting options. Reports can
cover either the contents of an inventory or the adjustments made to it
during a user-specified period. Inventories can be reported for specific
owners — company, contractor, rental or all three.
If the user has requested that the inventories of all owners should be
reported, the report can be sorted according to owner (this means that the
items belonging to each class of owner will be grouped together). By
default, the report will be sorted according to item type.
A scrolling list enables the user to select the inventories which are to be
included in the report. If required, the user can select a REPORT ALL
toggle button to include all inventories in the report. The number of items
in each inventory is listed beside the inventory name in the
INVENTORIES TO REPORT list.

Figure 15-8
Report
Selection

15-8 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Chapter 16

Equipment Failure

The equipment failure application provides a standardized


yet flexible method for the recording, retrieval and analysis
of equipment related failures.

Reference Guide 16-1


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Equipment Failure DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Overview
Located on the daily operations menu of the DEAP application launcher,
this application is intended to fulfill a number of requirements:
• Provides a convenient method for the administering, recording and
reporting of individual failures on site.
• Generates paper copy failure reports in a standard format, which can
also be reproduced.
• In the event of a failure, provides useful information concerning
similar occurrences.
• Allows for examination of equipment failures at the planning stage, to
avoid expensive repetitions.
• Supports analysis of equipment failures to identify common trends,
from which guidance notes and practices may be modified.

Navigation

Open File Main Failure


Window Menu Window Information

Event Component Summary Actions Browse


Window Window Window Window Report Window

Index cards: Index cards: Comments: Edit Actions Index cards:


Links General Operations Window Choice
General Hole Immediate Strings
Status Properties Long Term Range
Mode Geometry Investigate Time
Loads Recommend
Mud
History
Failure Data
Sheet Window

Failure Data
Sheet Picture

The main window of the Equipment Failure application provides icons or


buttons for all of the sub-windows. Many of the sub-windows are designed
like tabbed index cards, each with its own specific set of data requirements.

16-2 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Equipment Failure

Application Main Window


The main window is divided into two principal areas — one contains icons
enabling the user to select and edit failure information, and the other shows
a summary of the currently selected failure. The data in the text fields
cannot be edited here.
With the exception of the BROWSE icon, all icons and all text fields relate
to an individual failure entry. The BROWSE icon provides access to the
browse window, which enables users to view multiple failures using a
variety of optional selection filter criteria.
When the equipment failure application is first opened, only the FILE and
BROWSE icons are active. The remaining icons will be activated when a
new failure event is created or an existing entry opened by means of the
options available on the file menu under the FILE icon.

Figure 16-1
Equipment
Failure Main
Window
Activated Icons

Special Features
FILE icon — in addition to providing the user with standard file
management options, the file operations menu also provides the user with
links to the progress log data base in the form of two additional selections,
labelled insert from PRG and link to PRG.

Reference Guide 16-3


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Equipment Failure DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

FAILURE INFO button — displays a window fore the current failure,


showing when the item was first created and when it was last modified.

Figure 16-2
Main Window
Failure
Information Sub-
window

File Operations
When the equipment failure application is first opened and the
main window first appears, only the FILE and the BROWSE
icons are active. Thus the user is guided to use the FILE options menu to
either generate a new equipment failure data file or open an existing data
file, or to search the data base by means of the browse function, explained
in a later section.
The FILE menu provides the options NEW, OPEN, SAVE and DELETE;
the remaining options relate to individual failure entries in the data base.

Parent/Child Data Entry Hierarchy


Since one failure may open give rise to other failures, the equipment failure
application allows entries to be grouped in a hierarchical manner. Thus one
or more failures can be entered as sub-failures (children) of some previous
entry (parent), and these child failures can in turn have their own child
failure entries.
Although there is no limit on the number of levels of sub-failures, in
practice it is unlikely that the user will exceed three or four levels.
The equipment failure application does impose some rules on parent events
as a consequence of their children:
• Parental start and end dates must span all the child start and end dates.
• Parent events cannot be set to RESOLVED unless all children events
have been RESOLVED.

Navigating the Data Base Using the Hierarchy


One advantage that derives directly from the grouping of related failures is
that it becomes easier to find a particular entry in the data base.

16-4 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Equipment Failure

The equipment failure application depicts the parent/child relationship


graphically as a series of linked icons in its file selection window, which is
used in conjunction with the NEW, OPEN and DELETE file options.
The icons themselves change in appearance depending upon whether or not
the particular entry has associated children, and whether those children are
currently depicted. In addition to the icons, the user may choose by the use
of toggle buttons to view additional information concerning the entries,
including equipment class and type.
Finally the user may also apply a filter to restrict the number of entries
displayed. The filter has a number of options available, but some care
should be exercised since child entries will only be displayed if their parent
fulfills the filter criterion.

File Menu Options

New and Open


By means of the NEW option, the user is able to create new failure entry,
either a new parent (NEW button), or a child of some previous entry (NEW
CHILD button). In the case of a child, the user must first select an existing
entry as the parent by using the mouse to highlight it. The OPEN option
enables the user to view or modify an existing failure entry.

Figure 16-3
Open
Windows

Reference Guide 16-5


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Equipment Failure DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Special Features
VIEW toggle buttons — by means of these toggle buttons the user is able
to define the type of data presented the list of equipment failures displayed.
FILTER radio buttons and pick lists — these features of the open window
allow the user to select other lists of equipment failures for viewing.
NEW button — allows the user to create a new parent failure entry.
NEW CHILD button — allows the user to create a new child failure entry.

Delete
A DELETE button enables the user to remove the action currently
highlighted, provided that the action is not a parent.

Events
The EVENT window contains information relevant to all types of
equipment failure. It consists of four sub-windows, selected by means of
labelled tabs, much like a tabbed index card. To move among the cards, the
user should click on the appropriate tab.

Links Sub-Window
The LINKS sub-window enables users to “link” an equipment failure event
with other DEAP data base tables. The progress log contains a number of
event codes indicating equipment failure, and where possible EFA entries
should be linked to an appropriate progress log event.

Figure 16-4
Event Window
Links Sub-
window

16-6 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Equipment Failure

Progress Log Failure pick list


Upon the selection of a progress log from this pick list, the EFA will search
the progress log selected for possible failure type events that have not
already been reconciled with entries in the EFA data base.
If the user first sets either or both the FACILITY and PROGRAM fields in
the GENERAL sub-window, these fields will then be used as a filter
against the progress log entries.
In addition to information such as facility and program the progress log and
related tables also contain information of particular relevance to downhole
component failures, such as mud type. Thus the EFA can use values
obtained from these tables as defaults for a number of COMPONENT
window fields. Note that the user can elect to overwrite all fields in the
EFA or only those fields that are currently empty.
Finally it may also be possible for the EFA to select an appropriate BHA
number based upon the program and failure time. The EFA will issue a
warning if there are more than one BHA in use at the failure time.

Table of Progress Log Failure Event Codes

Code Description Code Description


325 Weak point failed to break 10104 Suspend function: problems
encountered

10035 Had equipment failure 10105 Electrical integrity lost

10077 Misrun with wireline tool 10112 Wireline parted

10092 Survey obtained outwith tech spec 10121 Guns retrieved - misfile

10094 Problem with subsea equipment 10166 Guns failed

10101 Suspend pressure test; observe leakoff 10257 Wire parted

10102 Suspend test; surface equipment leaked 10260 Wire stranded, stuck in grease head

10103 Suspend test; observe returns from 10308 Coil tubing parted
wellbore

Reference Guide 16-7


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Equipment Failure DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

General Sub-Window
The GENERAL tabbed sub-window contains information relevant to all
types of failures. The information provided here will be automatically
transferred to the uneditable text fields on the main equipment failure
window once the user presses the apply button.

Figure 16-5
Event Window
General Sub-
window

Failure Name text field


A required user-definable reference by which the failure entry may be
subsequently identified, and must therefore be unique.

Facility, Rig, Well and Program pick lists


These fields are specified using pick lists, and may not be modified if the
failure entry has been linked to the progress log. FACILITY is a required
field, without which the failure cannot be saved to the data base.

Equipment Class and Equipment Type pick lists


These fields provide a means of classifying equipment failures in a manner
that facilitates future searches of the data base, and data entry is by means
of pick lists. EQUIPMENT CLASS is a required field.
The table below shows the defined equipment classes with their
corresponding types. Because it may not be possible to identify the
particular piece of equipment at fault when an event is first entered into the
EFA, it is possible to set both the class and type to NOT YET DEFINED
(which is also the default condition).
However, for meaningful data base searches to be possible, these fields
must be entered correctly at the earliest opportunity. Note that types are
specific to the class, and if the class is subsequently modified, the type will
revert to NOT YET DEFINED.

16-8 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Equipment Failure

Table of Equipment Classes and Types

Class Type Class Type


NOT YET NOT YET DEFINED Services/ NOT YET DEFINED
DEFINED Surface
Other Electric Wireline Equipment (not perf)
Drill String NOT YET DEFINED Coil Tubing Equipment
Drill Pipe (DP) Fracture Equipment
Heavy Weight Drill Pipe (HWDP) Mud Logging Equipment
Drill Collar (DC) MWD Surface Equipment
Stabilizer Snubbing Equipment
Measurement/Logging While Drilling (MWD/ Slickline/Braided Cable Equipment
LWD)
Motor/Turbine Survey Tools (not MWD)
Coring Equipment Cementing System
Bit/Mill/Core-head Cuttings Injection System
Drilling Jar Other
Fishing Tools Casing, NOT YET DEFINED
Cross-over Sub Tubing & Casing
Wellhead/
Circulating Sub Downhole Tubing
Torque Redistribution Equipment Conductor
Drill Pipe Protector Casing/Tubing Hanger
Reamer Liner Hanger
Hole Opener Running Tools
Other Accessories
Rig NOT YET DEFINED Other
Equipment
Circulating System/Mud Pump (Solids Control) Casing, NOT YET DEFINED
Hoist System Tubing & Wellhead
Wellhead/
Pipe Handling System Surface Guide Base
Rotating Equipment Casing/Tubing Hanger
Blow out Preventer (BOP) and Diverter System Casing Running Equipment
Bulk System Accessories
Power System Other
Riser System Completion/ NOT YET DEFINED
Testing -
Marine System/Equipment/Mooring Sub-sea Safety Valve
Downhole
Skid System Artificial Lift Equipment
Other Screens/Slotted Liner
Services/ NOT YET DEFINED Packers
Downhole
Electric Wireline Equipment (not perf) Down Hole Test Tools
Coil Tubing Equipment Down Hole Perforating Equipment
Fracture Equipment Plugs
Slickline/Braided Cable Equipment Other
Survey Tools (not MWD) Completion/ NOT YET DEFINED
Testing -
Cuttings Injection System Christmas Tree
Surface
Other Surface Test Equipment
Artificial Lift Equipment
Other

Reference Guide 16-9


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Equipment Failure DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Operation pick list


To be specified using pick lists, this field is included because it is possible
for a particular piece of equipment to fail under different circumstances.
For instance an item may fail due to mishandling, during make-up, or in
normal use.

Operation Operation
Rotary Drilling Fishing
Sliding Drilling Run Casing / Tubing / Conductor
Drilling Shoetrack Pull Casing / Tubing / Conductor
Hole Opening / Underreaming Drive Conductor
Milling/Cutting Rig up / down, pickup / laydown
Coring Running Riser / BOP
Reaming Cementing
Backreaming Testing Equipment
Circulating Mooring / Positioning
Pulling out of Hole (POOH) Wireline logging
Running in Hole (RIH) LWD logging
Pumping out of Hole Perforating
Washing in Hole Surveying
Work Stuck Pipe - Jar Work / Set downhole tools
Work Stuck Pipe - apply torque Frac pack
Work Stuck Pipe - apply over pull Production / Injection
Work Stuck Pipe - apply weight down Stimulation
Work Stuck Pipe - overpull + torque Other
Work Stuck Pipe - weight down + torque

16-10 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Equipment Failure

Status Sub-Window
The EVENT STATUS window is divided into two sections. If the event is
a child, then the first section shows the name and start and end times of the
parent event. The second section contains the STATUS, START TIME,
END TIME and COST of the current event.

Figure 16-6
Event Window
Status Sub-
window

Special Features
STATUS pick lists — enable the user to enter data in the table below.

Class Status
Identified A failure has been detected and preliminary entries made.

Reported The operating conditions have been checked and EFA entries completed.

Assigned The failure has been assigned for investigation.

Resolved The entry is completed and closed.

START TIME and END TIME clock icons — start time is a required field
that will default to the time given in the progress log if it has been linked to
the equipment failure. End time defaults to undefined. Note that for a child
event, the start and end times cannot be set outside of the parental start and
end times.
COST text field — a numeric input with no default.

Reference Guide 16-11


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Equipment Failure DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Mode Sub-Window
The EVENT MODE window bears a direct relationship with the Drill
String Failure Handbook, which was produced in order to assist with the
correct classification of failure modes.
Because it is possible that a failure may be the result of more than one
mechanism, users are able to specify the PRIMARY MODE and two
optional SECONDARY MODES as contributing factors. Modes are set
using pick lists. Note that the primary mode must be defined before a
contributory mode can be set.

Figure 16-7
Event Window
Mode Sub-
window

Special Features
FAILURE HELP MANUAL button — provides an on-line version of the
Drill String Failure Handbook in both text and pictures, covering the
twelve failure modes that appear in both the primary and secondary mode
pick lists. descriptions of other equipment failure modes by pressing the
help on failure mode menu button.

Mode Validity Mode Validity


Torsional Overload Corrosion

Fatigue Stress Corrosion Cracking

Mechanical Damage Over Torque of Tool Joints

Heatchecking Equipment Failed to Operate

Galling Twist Off Primary only

Wear Wash Out Primary only

Erosion Other - Report details in Summary Primary only

16-12 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Equipment Failure

Figure 16-8
Event Window
Mode Sub-
window, Failure
Data Sheet Help
Window option

PICTURE button — pressing this button opens another window which


contains a visual image of the failure mode described in the failure data
sheet window, designed to provide the user with additional assistance in
ensuring the accuracy of his selection of a primary failure mode.
Depending on the image, it may take a while for it to appear.

Figure 16-9
Event Window
Mode Sub-
window, Failure
Data Sheet
Picture

Reference Guide 16-13


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Equipment Failure DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Components
The COMPONENT window consists of seven tabbed sub-
windows that enable the user to enter general, hole, property, geometry,
load, mud and history data relating to the equipment failure.

Figure 16-10
Component
Specification
Window
General Sub-
window

Because the EFA is applicable to all types of equipment failure, some


fields may not be relevant in the context of a particular component, while
other items can only be completed by further analysis (for example using
the drill string simulator to obtain the equivalent yield stress). Thus ALL
fields of the COMPONENT windows are optional, and it is left the user’s
discretion to decide what information is relevant.
In general, downhole component failures will require the most input.
However even her a number of fields may only be relevant for subsequent
detailed analysis of the failure. For this reasons a RIG VIEW toggle button
has been added to the window, the purpose of which is to restrict the
number of active fields as a guide to users on the rig site as to what data
they could reasonably be expected to provide.

Component Input Requirements and Defaults


If the failure entry has been linked to the progress log, then information
from various DEAP tables will be used to help complete many of the fields.
If the failed item is part of a BHA assembly, then further default data can
be obtained by selecting the appropriate BHA component. The section for
each sub-window contains a table summarizing the input data requirements
and default data sources for the various sub-windows.

16-14 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Equipment Failure

Special Features
RIG VIEW button — facilitates data entry at the rig site by removing the
geometry sub-window and restricting the number of available data fields to
those rig site users can be reasonably expected to provide.

General Sub-Window
Displayed earlier, the COMPONENT GENERAL sub-window contains
information relevant to all types of equipment, including items such as
ITEM SUPPLIER and FAILURE TEMPERATURE.

General Component Input Requirements and Defaults

Field Name Rig View Default


Item Supplier Yes BHA Component

Item Serial Number Yes BHA Component

Item Part Number BHA Component

Failure Temperature

Date of Manufacture

Date Last Inspected

Comments

Special Feature
COMMENTS button — provides the user with access to a window into
which up to 255 characters describing the item in greater detail may be
entered.

Figure 16-11
Component
Window
General Sub-
window,
Comments option

Reference Guide 16-15


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Equipment Failure DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Hole Sub-Window
The COMPONENT HOLE sub-window contains information primarily
relevant to downhole failures, such as MD and HOLE SIZE.

Figure 16-12
Component
Window
Hole Sub-window

Component Hole Input Requirements and Defaults

Field Name Rig View Default


BHA Number Yes Time Event Actual

BHA Component Yes

Failure MD Yes

Failure TVD Yes

Dog Leg Severity Yes

Inclination Yes

Hole Size Yes Daily Well Status

If the failure event has been linked to the progress log, the BHA number
may be defaulted if there is no ambiguity; otherwise the BHA number
should be selected from the pick list.
If the failed component is a BHA component, then this field should be
completed using the pick list provided. Choosing a BHA component will
update a number of component fields automatically.

Note: Note that the BHA component is dependent upon the BHA
number. If the latter is subsequently modified, then the
component and other dependent fields will be cleared.

16-16 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Equipment Failure

Properties Sub-Window
The COMPONENT PROPERTIES sub-window contains information
primarily relevant to downhole failures, such as COMPONENT LENGTH.
Some defaults may be obtained using the BHA Number.

Figure 16-13
Component
Window
Properties Sub-
window

Component Properties Input Requirements and Defaults

Field Name Rig View Default


Material Grade BHA Component

Component Shape BHA Component

Component Length Yes BHA Component

Bore Back

Stress Relief Groove

Geometry Sub-Window
The COMPONENT GEOMETRY sub-wind contains information
primarily relevant to downhole failures, such as BODY ID.

Reference Guide 16-17


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Equipment Failure DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Defaults may be obtained using the BHA Number.

Figure 16-14
Component
Window
Geometry Sub-
window

Component Geometry Input Requirements and Defaults

Field Name Rig View Default


Body OD BHA Component

Body ID BHA Component

Connection OD BHA Component

Connection ID BHA Component

Connection Length BHA Component

Connection Top Thread BHA Component

Connection Bottom Thread BHA Component

Loads Sub-Window
The COMPONENT LOADS sub-window contains information primarily
relevant to downhole failures, such as HOOKLOAD.

16-18 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Equipment Failure

Some defaults may be obtained using the BHA Number; other entries, such
as equivalent yield stress, will require further analysis by other applications
(such as the drill string simulator).

Figure 16-15
Components
Window
Loads Sub-window

Component Loads Input Requirements and Defaults

Field Name Rig View Default


Hookload Yes

WOB Yes Daily Well Status

Make Up Torque Yes

Tension @ P of F

Equivalent Yield Stress

Stand Pipe Pressure Yes Daily Slow Circulation Rate

Bit RPM Yes Daily Well Status

Rotary RPM Yes Daily Well Status

Surface On Bottom Torque Yes Daily Well Status

Surface Off Bottom Torque Yes Daily Well Status

Reference Guide 16-19


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Equipment Failure DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Mud Sub-Window
The COMPONENT MUD sub-window contains information primarily
relevant to downhole failures, such as MUD TYPE. Some defaults may be
obtained using the BHA Number.

Figure 16-16
Component
Window
Mud Sub-window

Component Mud Input Requirements and Defaults

Field Name Rig View Default


Mud Type Yes Daily Mud Report

Mud Weight Yes Daily Mud Report

Fluid PH Yes Daily Mud Report

Fluid Chlorides Yes Daily Mud Report

Flow Rate Yes Daily Mud Report

History Sub-Window
The COMPONENT HISTORY sub-window provides an opportunity to
record historical operational information concerning a particular
component that may be relevant to its failure. For example, a component
may have been subjected to extreme force in one operation, but
subsequently failed in another.

16-20 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Equipment Failure

Each entry consists of a row of data fields containing information such as


operation start and finish, loads, mud details, etc. Although much of this
detail will only be relevant to downhole components, there is also a free
text comment field associated with each entry which can be used to record
information for any type of component.e

Figure 16-17
Component
Window
History Sub-window

Special Features
ADD button — this window operates like a spreadsheet, and pressing the
add button will generate numbered rows with data fields in each column
that may be activated by selecting the text field into which the user wishes
to enter data. Selecting text fields that refer to date and time will call up the
standard DEAP date/time window.
DELETE button — this button will cause the selected row to be deleted
and the numbering sequence of the rows to be updated automatically.

Summaries
The FAILURE SUMMARY window provides the user with five
tabbed sub-windows, each containing a comments box in which the user
may enter an unlimited number of remarks summarizing the following with
regards to the specific equipment failure being logged:
• Operations at the time of failure
• Immediate actions taken at the time of failure
• Long term actions
• The investigation of the failure
• Your recommendations as a result of the failure

Reference Guide 16-21


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Equipment Failure DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

There is no limit to the length of text that can be entered, and the user may
append or modify entries at will.

Figure 16-18
Failure
Summary
Window

Actions
The ACTIONS window is a convenient mechanism for the
assigning and tracking of actions against companies, groups or individuals.
In a manner similar to failure events themselves, the EFA allows actions to
be organized in a hierarchical manner. Thus one or more actions can be
entered as sub-actions (children) of some previous action (parent), and
these child actions can in turn have their own child action entries. The EFA
does not place a limit on the number of levels of sub-actions.
The EFA imposes some rules on parent actions as a consequence of their
children:
• Parent actions cannot be set to COMPLETED unless all children have
been COMPLETED.
• Parent actions cannot be DELETED unless all their children are first
DELETED.
The EFA depicts the parent/child relationship graphically as a series of
linked icons in the main action window. The icons themselves change in
appearance depending upon whether or not the particular entry has
associated children. In addition to the icons, the user may choose by the use
of toggle buttons to view additional information concerning the entries,
including status and owner.

16-22 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Equipment Failure

Figure 16-19
Actions Window

Special Features
ADD button — enables the user to add a new parent action.
ADD CHILD button — enables the user to add a child action as a child of
the action currently highlighted.
EDIT — enables the user to modify the action currently highlighted.
DELETE — enables the user to remove the action currently highlighted,
provided that the action is not a parent.

Enter Actions Taken


Pressing the ADD, ADD CHILD and EDIT buttons invokes the ACTION
INPUT window,.

Figure 16-20
Edit Action
Window

Reference Guide 16-23


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Equipment Failure DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Special Features
TITLE — a user-definable reference by which the action entry may be
subsequently identified.
OWNER — provides a pick list of registered DEAP users. However it is
also possible to select OTHER from the pick list, so that actions can be
owned by those who are not DEAP users. The name is entered as free text.
DUE DATE — set using the standard date/time icon and pick lists.
STATUS — may be set as either UNCOMPLETED (default) or
COMPLETED> A parent action cannot be set as completed unless all
children are also completed.
PRIORITY — a pick list with the options HIGH, MEDIUM or LOW.
ISSUE DATE — a display only field that is automatically set when the
action is first generated.
ACTIONS — a free text field where the user can document the action to be
performed. There is no limit to the length of text that can be entered.

Browsing the Data Base


The BROWSE function allows users to search the DEAP data
base to locate specific equipment failures.
The browse window is divided into two sections. The filter section on the
right contains four tabbed sub-windows in which the user may specify
details for a specific type of equipment failure.
Once the user has completed the selection process in all four filter sub-
windows and pressed the filter button, the failure section on the left will be
automatically refreshed and a list of failures that meet the requirements
specified will be available for selection.

16-24 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Equipment Failure

Figure 16-21
Browse
Window
With the
Choice Sub-
window

Special Features
FILTER button — allows the user to make filter selections in all four sub-
windows before electing to apply any of the selections.
REPORT button — this button allows the user to view a report of the
equipment failure selected direct from this window. The SUMMARY
report option provides a list of all the failure items currently selected,
highlighting the values of those fields for which filtering is active.
SUMMARY button — generates a search summary report.
CLEAR ALL button — this button clears the entire window, including all
four sub-windows, of all previous selections, which allows the user to
proceed to make another set of selections.

Choice Sub-window
The CHOICE tabbed sub-window allows users to filter items that have
defined types. After a selection from a pick list or option is made,
switching the toggle buttons to ON or OFF enables and disables filtering
on a specific item.

Reference Guide 16-25


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Equipment Failure DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Strings Sub-window
The STRINGS sub-window allows users to filter for non-numeric values.
Text searching is performed using wild cards.

Figure 16-22
Browse
Window
Strings Sub-
window

Special Feature
WILD CARD function — if you are not quite sure of the name of the item,
text search “wild cards” are available to make your search easier.
• & will match any number of characters (for example “this is %”
would find the string matching “this is a test string”).
• _ will match any single character (for example “this is _ test _tring”
would find the string matching “this is a test string”).

16-26 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Equipment Failure

Range Sub-Window
The RANGE sub-window allows filtering on numerical values with a
MIN/MAX range. Empty fields are ignored

Figure 16-23
Browse Window
Range Sub-
window

Examples
“MIN value of 100” will find all values greater than or equal to 100
“MAX value of 1000” will find all values less than or equal to 1000
“MIN value 100 to MAX value 1000” will find all values greater than or
equal to 100 and less than or equal to 1000.”

Reference Guide 16-27


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Equipment Failure DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Time Sub-Window
The TIME sub-window allows filtering for EFA failures between a defined
start and stop time and duration.

Figure 16-24
Browse Window
Time Sub-window

16-28 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Equipment Failure

Report
The equipment failure report contains all the information entered for the
current failure entry, and is displayed on the standard DEAP report viewer.

Note: Changes made to the EFA data are not automatically


reflected in an open report window; it is necessary to
press the rerun button to update the display, so users can
open multiple reports showing different failure events.

Reference Guide 16-29


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Equipment Failure DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Page Two

16-30 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Chapter 17

Morning Drilling Report

This application enables the user to create and edit the


morning report. The user can also review earlier reports,
although if they have been committed they are regarded as
the formal record of the activity on the rig and cannot be
edited.

Reference Guide 17-1


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Morning Drilling Report DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Overview
Reporting Categories
There are 18 major reporting categories. These include:
• Well status
• Pumps
• Bit
• BHA
• Drilling fluids
• Mud log
• Well control
• Cost
• Bulk materials
• Safety
• Weather — not available for land based rigs
• Personnel
• Rig response — only available when the rig is semi-submersible,
drillship, platform or barge
• Logistics — only available when the rig is semi-submersible, jackup,
drillship, platform or barge
• Progress log
• Surveys
• Coring
• Comments
For convenience, it is possible to have several sections of the report open at
once. When a category is not available, its icon will be blank.

Links with Other Applications


The morning drilling report draws information from several other
applications to reduce the amount of data entry required from the user. For
some applications which are not mandatory requirements, the user will
have to enter the data manually.

17-2 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Morning Drilling Report

The applications which send data to the morning drilling report are:
• Bit/BHA actual
• Daily cost tracking (if it has been used)
• Directional survey calculator
• Drilling fluid actual (if it has been used)
• Casing actual (if it has been used)
• Geology actual (if it has been used)
• Progress log
• Rig initialization
• Stock control
• Well initialization
• FIT report

Additional Data
Due to local requirements which may mean that additional data has to be
recorded within the morning drilling report itself, an ADDITIONAL
feature has been built in to DEAP to allow this to be done. This feature is
optional and may be activated, on a facility basis, only by the database
administrator.
For certain of the sub-applications within the morning drilling report,
therefore, two versions of window layout are possible — the one being
displayed is dependent upon whether the DBA has activated additional
data reporting within the facility default settings. Where alternative
window layouts are applicable, both windows will be displayed here within
the text.
In some cases, an additional window may also be available via an
ADDITIONAL… button when the facility defaults have been set to allow
the additional data entry. These windows will also be displayed and
documented within this section of the manual.

IADC/API Reports
The morning drilling report complies with the data requirements of the
IADC/API official daily drilling report form, which is a legal requirement
in some countries. This official report forms are supplied by the
International Association of Drilling Contractors (IADC).

Reference Guide 17-3


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Morning Drilling Report DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

An option in the facility defaults utility allows the DBA to switch on IADC
reporting. When this has been switched on by the DBA, the additional
windows and fields will become available to the user. The DBA will also
be able to specify the number of tours per day (1, 2 or 3 tours).
Additional information required are such details as manufacturer, grade
and stroke length of pumps, a time breakdown by IADC code within the
progress log details and tour details for bits and drillpipe sections/drilling
assemblies, etc.
Two IADC report options — CURRENT IADC REPORT… and IADC
REPORTS… are also available. If no data has been entered into an IADC
window, but an IADC report is output, the relevant section in the report
will print out but with blank textfields.
With IADC reporting switched on, the morning drilling report application
will be able to output the faxable three page IADC/API drilling report.
There are two versions of the report for two and three tour rig crew rotas.
The morning drilling report will be able to determine which crew rota is
being used for the current facility and will therefore be able to generate the
correct version of the IADC/API report.

Moving through Lists of Entries


Many of the windows in this application present lists of entries. At the top
of each list, there will be a line giving the numbers of the visible entries and
an indication of the total number of entries in the list. The up and down
arrow buttons enable the user to scroll through the list, a page at a time.

COMPLETE Buttons
Most of the morning report generator windows have COMPLETE buttons.
The buttons become active when all mandatory data entry text fields have
been completed. They save the data to the database and close the current
sub-application window.
Text fields in windows which have been completed are still editable, by re-
opening the window and editing them in the normal way. However, once a
report has been committed by clicking the button on the main window, all
text fields become read-only.

17-4 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Morning Drilling Report

Navigation
Navigation in the morning report application is concerned mostly with
moving between the main window and the sub-applications.
Only bit, bulk materials and initialization details can call up further levels
of sub-application, although where additional data entry has been set up,
some windows will contain ADDITIONAL… and/or IADC… buttons
which will call up other data entry windows.

Main
Window

Well Pumps Bit BHA Drilling Mud


Status Fluids Log

Additional Bit Condition/ Additional Additional Additional


Performance
IADC Details IADC Details IADC Details
IADC Details

Well Cost Safety Weather Bulk Initialization Personnel


Control

Additional Additional Bulk Materials


Storage Configuration

Rig Response Logistics Progress Survey Coring Comments


Log

Additional IADC Details

Reports: Days vs. Depth

Current MDR Current IADC Cost vs. Depth

Morning Reports IADC Reports Cost vs. Time

Reference Guide 17-5


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Morning Drilling Report DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Application Main Window


The main window gives the user access to all of the appropriate reporting
categories and to previous morning reports.
As data entry to each of the reporting categories is completed, the user
clicks the category’s COMPLETE button and the corresponding icon on
the main window will change from black on white to white on black —
allowing the user to see which aspects of the report still need to be
completed. The survey, coring and comments sections of the report are not
mandatory.
If the most recent report has been committed, the application will assume
that the user intends to start a new one. The new report will run from 0600
hours on the current date. If a report is incomplete, it may still be saved to
the database without having been committed.

Figure 17-1
Main Window

Special features
To conform to the standards required by the IADC/API daily drilling report
form, details of the program, well, rig, operator and contractor are
displayed at the top of the window.
COMMIT… — instructs the system to carry out data checks on the data
entered in each of the reporting categories and, if the data is acceptable and
complete, mark the report permanently as read-only.
INITIALIZATION DETAILS… — opens the initialization details
window.

17-6 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Morning Drilling Report

REPORTS–> — provides a selection of reports to output — the


CURRENT REPORT, CURRENT IADC REPORT, a DAYS VS DEPTH
graph, a COST VS DEPTH graph and MORNING REPORTS… and
IADC REPORTS… which call up the print setup window (see the section
on report generation at the end of this chapter).
The standard DEAP report viewer window will be used for viewing each of
these reports and for sending them to the printer .

Initialization Details
The initialization window contains the dates of when the rig arrived on
location, when it was spudded in and when the program started. The dates
form the basis for subsequent calculations about the duration of the
program: depth versus days, depth versus time, days from spud and AFE
start.
The data in this window will normally be written only once per well.

Figure 17-2
Initialization Data

Special features
DATE ON LOCATION — completed automatically with data from the rig
initialization application.
BULK STORAGE CONFIGURATION… — provides access to the bulk
storage configuration window.

Bulk Materials Storage Configuration


This sub-application is used to define the way in which each bulk material
will be described. It is not concerned with the quantity of materials actually
present on the rig — that is entered via the bulk materials window.
Each definition consists of either three or four parts: the material’s name,
the terms in which it is measured, the units in which the quantity on the rig
is to be reported and, where appropriate, the quantity per unit.

Reference Guide 17-7


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Morning Drilling Report DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

For instance, base oil (material name) might be measured in drums


(measurement units) of 55 gal/drum (quantity per unit) and reported by the
bulk total on the rig (reporting quantity). The user can opt to have the
consumption of the material during the reporting period included in the
morning drilling report.
When a new mix of cement is to be specified, the storage and reporting
descriptions are entered here after the user has clicked on the ADD MIX…
button on the bulk materials window. Cement type can be either NEAT,
BLENDED or TLW. If BLENDED or TLW has been selected, the user can
enter a free text DESCRIPTION of the cement.
The window can appear in two separate guises, as illustrated below,
depending on which sub-application has called it. The data which has to be
entered is the same in each case.
In the lower half of the window called up from the initialization data
window, there is a display of all bulk materials present on the rig. The user
may use the up and down arrows to scroll through the list as required.

Figure 17-3
Bulk Materials
Storage
Configuration
— As called from
the initialization
data window

Figure 17-4
Bulk Materials
Storage
Configuration
— as called from
the bulk materials
ADD MIX… button

17-8 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Morning Drilling Report

Well Status
The well status window is presented in two sections. The top
section describes the current dimensions of the hole; the lower section
describes the current operating parameters.
When the window opens, the hole size, last casing size and depth will be
read in from the DEAP database if the information is available. The values
to be entered in this window should be current at report time..

Figure 17-5
Well Status
window
- Including
Additional and
IADC buttons

Additional Well Status Data Entry


If additional data entry has been set for the current facility, then the
ADDITIONAL button will be available and the additional well status
window will be displayed when the user presses it.

Figure 17-6
Additional
Well Status
Data

Reference Guide 17-9


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Morning Drilling Report DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Additional Data for the IADC/API Report


If IADC reporting has been set up within the facility defaults application
for the current facility, the IADC… button will be available and will call up
the IADC additional data window.
At the top of the window, there is a display of the names of the current
operator, well and rig, the report number and time to which the status
details refer.
If this window is not used, only the casing size and depth are recorded in
the morning report. The user can add further details about the last casing
tubing and liner and also a wireline record by entering data in the fields
provided.
Casing/tubing/liner details include size, make, weight, grade, the number
of joints, RKB to casing head and the depth to which they are set.
Wireline details include the wireline reel number, the wireline size, the
number of wirelines, the distance slipped, the cut off length, the number of
trips since the last cut and the cumulative number of trips.
The system will attempt to import all required data from the casing actual
application, but if this is not possible, manual data entry will be required.

Figure 17-7 IADC Additional Data — well status

17-10 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Morning Drilling Report

Pumps
The pump window enables the user to review and edit the details
of the pumps on the rig. Pump details are presented in a table,
with entries for efficiency, stroke rate, liner size, circulation rate and status.
An additional column has been added to the pumps window to comply with
the IADC/API reporting requirements — the pump stroke length will be
added at the right hand side of the data entry columns. In addition, the
pump manufacturer’s name and type will be displayed at the left hand side
of each pump row.
The pump numbers, manufacturers, types and stroke length will be
imported from the rig initialization application and will not be editable.
When the window first opens the pump status of all pumps included will be
set to UNUSED and no details will be shown in the data columns.
Circulation rate will be calculated from efficiency, liner size, pump type
and stroke rate.

Figure 17-8
Pump
Details

Bit
The bit window enables the user to review the details of the bits
run during the report interval; none of the text fields is editable.
The displayed data is obtained from the bit/BHA actual application.
Most of the data required to satisfy the requirements of the IADC/API
official report are already available on the bit window. However, the IADC
code and the bit grade are now included in the window as read-only fields.

Reference Guide 17-11


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Morning Drilling Report DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

An additional IADC window is also available via the IADC… button. It


contains various relevant formation data including footage data.

Figure 17-9
Bit Details

Bit Condition and Performance


The BIT CONDITION/PERFORMANCE… button opens a window for
entering and reviewing condition and performance data about the selected
bit. This window displays the operating parameters for the currently
selected bit. When the parameters are not available from the bit/BHA
actual application, the user can enter them manually.

Figure 17-10
Bit Condition
and
Performance
Details

The BIT CONDITION pick lists contain settings for the following:
• I (inside rows dullness)
• O (outside rows dullness)
• D (dull characteristic)
• L (location)
• B (bearings)
• G (gauge)
• O (other dull characteristics)
• R (reason pulled)

17-12 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Morning Drilling Report

Additional IADC data


Most of the data in the additional IADC data window will be picked up
from the bits and BHA actual application, but there may be certain fields
which are not populated in this way. Data in such fields can be manually
entered. In fact, all of the data in the IADC window can be overwritten by
the user if the values shown are incorrect.
There may be multiple pages depending on the number of formations. The
arrow keys should be used to move between the pages.

Figure 17-11
BIT details
— additional
IADC data

BHA
The BHA window enables the user to review the details of the
BHAs run during the report interval; none of the text fields is
editable. The displayed data is obtained from the bit/BHA actual
application. The lower section of the window displays an abbreviated
description of the currently selected BHA.

Note: Dogleg severity does not appear within the application,


but the value is calculated.

The DBA can switch on IADC reporting and ADDITIONAL reporting for
the BHA sub-application.
When IADC reporting is switched on in the facility defaults application, an
IADC… button will be displayed on the window. This will call up the
additional IADC data window.

Reference Guide 17-13


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Morning Drilling Report DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

The only difference in the BHA windows which appear when the
additional data feature has been set up by the DBA and when it has not, is
the appearance of an ADDITIONAL… button at the bottom of the screen
when additional data has been switched on. Because of this only one
illustration of the window has been included here.
The additional BHA data window will be displayed when the
ADDITIONAL… button is pressed.
Figure 17-12
BHA Details

Additional BHA Data Window


The data displayed on this window is for information only and is taken
from the bit/BHA application. No data entry is possible from here.

Figure 17-13
Additional
BHA Data

17-14 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Morning Drilling Report

Additional IADC Data


This window is split into two sections — one for details of drill pipe size,
weight per length, grade, joint OD, thread type and string number (all for
two types of drillpipe), and the other containing details of the lengths of
stands drillpipe, singles drillpipe, the kelly down and BHA.
The names of the current rig and well are displayed at the top of the
window for user information.

Figure 17-14
Additional
IADC Data
— BHA drillpipe
section / drilling
assembly tours

Drilling Fluids
The drilling fluids window opens when the user clicks on the
mud icon on the main window. If the drilling fluids actual
application is in use, the application will import the last check data and the
fluid type option menu will be inactive. If it is not in use, the fluid type
used in the preceding morning report will be used as the default. However,
data from either source can be overwritten by the user, if necessary.
Depending on the user’s selection from the FLUID TYPE pick list, the
contents of the window will change to display text fields appropriate to the
selected fluid.

Additional data options


If additional data entry has been set up by the DBA, the ADDITIONAL…
button will appear at the bottom of the screen and a band in the lower part
of the window will hold injection details for the current well.

Reference Guide 17-15


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Morning Drilling Report DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Water-based, Oil-based and Synthetic-based Muds


The basic window for water-based, oil-based and synthetic-based muds is
almost exactly the same, except for water-based muds, MBT and fluid loss
data fields are substituted for the ESV and chlorides data fields.

Figure 17-15
Fluids
– Water-based,
oil-based and
synthetic-based
mud details

Special Feature
UPDATE — this button triggers an update of latest data from the day’s
drilling fluids reports into the morning drilling report. The items are pulled
from the fluids report upon creation of a new morning report and upon
pressing the update button.

Brine
The brine details window differs somewhat from the window for the water-
based, oil-based and synthetic-based muds, although many of the fields
remain the same.

17-16 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Morning Drilling Report

Figure 17-16
Fluids
– Brine details

Additional Data Window


This window is common to all three fluid types and is displayed when the
ADDITIONAL… button is selected on any of the fluid details windows
when the DBA has switched on the additional data option for the current
facility.
The FLUID TYPE item will automatically be displayed, based on the fluid
type set on the fluid details window and may not be edited.

Figure 17-17
Drilling Fluid
– Additional
data

Reference Guide 17-17


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Morning Drilling Report DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Additional IADC Data Window


As regards the requirements of the IADC/API report, almost all of the
required mud data is already displayed on the drilling fluids window.
However, an additional IADC data window containing a chemicals section
will be available via the IADC… button. All of the fields in this window
will be read-only.
The additional IADC data window will be displayed when the user selects
the IADC… button on the fluid details window. The data displayed here is
retrieved from the drilling fluids actual application is be read-only.

Figure 17-18
Fluids
— Additional
IADC data

Mud Log
The first section of the mud log is concerned with the primary
and secondary lithology types and percentages. Percentages are
corrected to ensure that their total does not exceed 100%.
The second section holds the average values of trip gas, background gas,
connection gas and pore pressure encountered during the period of the
report. When necessary, all values can be entered as decimals by selecting
FRACTION from the units selection pop-up menus.

Figure 17-19
Mud Log
Details

17-18 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Morning Drilling Report

Mud Log Additional Data


When the DBA has set up the additional data feature for the current
facility, the window shown below will be displayed, the only difference
from the standard mud log window being that an ADDITIONAL… button
is located at the bottom of the screen.

Figure 17-20
Mud Log —
Additional data

Well Control
The well control window consists of two sections: the top section
displays data about the most recent formation integrity and BOP
tests. MAASP is calculated from these figures and from data extracted
from the rig status window. The window’s lower section contains a table of
slow circulating rate parameters for each of the mud pumps on the rig.

Figure 17-21
Well Control
Details

Reference Guide 17-19


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Morning Drilling Report DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Mud and Well Costs


Daily and cumulative values for mud costs and well costs are
displayed in this window. The mud costs are supplied by the
drilling fluids actual application, while the well costs come from daily cost
tracking.
If either set of data is unavailable, the relevant text fields will display the
corresponding entries from the previous morning drilling report.

Figure 17-22
Mud and Well
Cost Details

Bulk Materials
The available quantities of the bulk materials can be entered via
this window. The units displayed for each of the material types
default to the selections made in the bulk materials storage configuration
window. The lower part of the window is devoted to cement batches, while
all other types of bulk material are described in the top half.

Figure 17-23
Bulk
Materials
Details

17-20 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Morning Drilling Report

Depending on the way in which the storage configuration for the batch has
been set up, the user will either enter a bulk quantity, or number of sacks
from which the bulk quantity will be calculated.
If the additional data option has been set up by the DBA, there will be an
additional field on the bulk materials details window — USED, in which
the user may enter the amount of the bulk material which has been used to
date. An extra column for the amount used will also appear in the bulk
materials table.

Adding Cement
When a new mix of cement is to be defined, the ADD MIX… button
causes the bulk materials storage configuration window to open. The user
enters the appropriate details there, and returns to the bulk materials
window to specify the quantity of the mix held on the rig.

Figure 17-24
Bulk Materials
Storage
Configuration

Safety
The safety details window is used to record the times and dates
of the safety drills carried out on the rig. Two text fields display
the numbers of accident and incident free days; toggles enable the user to
indicate that an accident or incident has taken place.

Note: Only drills in the current day’s log can be deleted.

If the user selects either of the ACCIDENT/INCIDENT toggles the


corresponding text field will be zeroed. Accidents are divided into those
which cause a loss of time (LTAs) and those which do not.
When the additional data option has been activated the only change to the
screen is the ADDITIONAL… button located at the bottom of the screen,
and so only the standard window is illustrated here.

Reference Guide 17-21


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Morning Drilling Report DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

.
Figure 17-25
Safety Details

Non-LTA Accident and Incident Reporting


The DAYS SINCE LAST LTA and DAYS SINCE LAST ACCIDENT/
INCIDENT text fields will increment automatically if no accidents have
been reported. However, both of these fields are editable while the two NO
toggle buttons are selected.

Additional Safety Data


For DEAP v3.0, the text field DAYS SINCE LAST SPILL has been added
to the additional safety data window. This is defined as the number of (non-
suspended) days since the last spill.
If a spill is reported, the field will be zeroed; otherwise, the default value
will be that recorded for the previous day incremented by one. On the first
day of a program, the default is the time since the last spill associated with
the current rig, or zero if none have been recorded for the rig.

Figure 17-26
Safety —
additional
data

17-22 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Morning Drilling Report

Weather
The weather details window comprises three sections. The top
section is used to describe wind speed and direction the middle
section covers visibility and the bottom section, sea conditions. The lower
section of this window is not available for land rigs.

Figure 17-27
Weather
Details

Additional Weather Data


When additional data reporting has been switched on by the DBA, the
weather window will have an extra ADDITIONAL… button at the bottom
of the screen. Pressing the ADDITIONAL… button calls up the additional
data window illustrated below.

Figure 17-28
Weather —
additional
data

Personnel
Personnel are broken down into three categories: operator,
contractor and service. This window records the number of
personnel in each category and the job title, name and initials of each of the
operator personnel.
The OPERATOR personnel number text field is mandatory.

Reference Guide 17-23


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Morning Drilling Report DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

When the additional data option is switched off, a radio button enables the
user to specify which of the operator personnel is the signatory of the
report.
When the additional data option has been selected, an extra data entry line
is added to the top section of the window. The additional data items which
may be entered are the following: OPERATOR SERVICE,
CONTRACTOR SERVICE, CATERING and MAX POB.
A series of radio buttons is also included for user selection: OPERATOR,
CONTRACTOR, SERVICE and LIST. The layout of the lower half of the
window will change depending on the selection made.
The first three options enable the user to use pick lists, text entry fields and
the ADD button to enter a title, name, initials, company and other
information, such as social security number.
The LIST option summarizes all the previous entries in the form of a
scrollable list.

Figure 17-29
Personnel
Details
(Operator)
- With additional
information
fields

Additional Personnel Details


As described above, when the DBA has switched on the additional data
option when configuring the details of the current facility, some additional
data entry fields and radio buttons will become available on the MDR
personnel window.

17-24 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Morning Drilling Report

IADC/API Report Requirements


To meet the requirements of the IADC/API drilling report, the following
(contract) drilling crew information has been included on the personnel
details additional window: crew member’s function (TITLE), surname,
initials, social security number, tour designation (morning/afternoon/
evening or day/night, the hours worked on the tour and a flag indicating
whether or not the crew member was injured during the tour.

Using Personnel Company and Title Dialog Boxes


These dialogue boxes have been introduced to the personnel details sub-
application to provide the user with the opportunity of being able to add
details for new service companies and for new job designations which have
not been included before.

Figure 17-30
Personnel
– Extended
pick list
dialog boxes

Personnel Companies and Personnel tTitles


Company Types

Rig Response
The rig response window is divided into two sections. The upper
section contains details of rig and riser conditions, the lower
section is a table of the tensions in the anchor system. This window is not
available for land based rigs.

Reference Guide 17-25


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Morning Drilling Report DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

When additional data reporting is set up by the DBA, a number of changes


appear to accommodate the additional data items. An ADDITIONAL…
button is also included at the bottom of the window..

Figure 17-31
Rig
Response
Details
- With the
Additional Data
option

Additional Rig Response Data


The additional data window contains three bands allowing for the entry of
more data on the following — RISER TENSIONER (tension and
pressure), GUIDELINE TENSIONER (tension) and THRUSTER (hours
and power). Arrow keys allow for scrolling between items.

Figure 17-32
Rig Response
— Additional
data

17-26 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Morning Drilling Report

Logistics
The logistics window contains a list of the names and the types
of the boats currently on location. These details will be imported
from the previous morning drilling report if there is one, otherwise the
window will be empty when it opens. This window is not available for land
based rigs.
A number of extra data items will be included on the logistics details
window when the additional data option has been switched on by the DBA.
These items are documented in the procedure outlined below and the other
window layout is illustrated after the procedure.

Figure 17-33
Logistics
Details
- with additional
data option

Special feature
DELETE — removes the currently selected boat from the list.

Progress Log
The progress log window is a read-only repeat of the data entered
into the progress log application.
In DEAP v3.0, three TOGGLE buttons were added, thus allowing the user
to select the types of activities to be printed in the dialog and on the report,
e.g. tasks, operations, and/or events. The selected configuration will be
saved on a per-user basis using the user preferences mechanism.
The user may then choose to make the data COMPLETE if no more
changes will be required and close the window to return to the main
window.

Reference Guide 17-27


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Morning Drilling Report DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Where no progress log data exists, the window will be blank and the
STATUS text field will display NO LOG.

Figure 17-34
Progress Log
Details

Time Distribution by IADC code


This window will display details of the breakdown of time against the
standard IADC operation codes which are included on the IADC/API
official drilling report form. It allows the user to make amendments to any
incorrect values and to define three specially reserved codes and one user-
defined completion code.

Figure 17-35
Progress Log –
IADC Time
Distribution
window, with pick
list buttons

A description pick list button is displayed when the user scrolls down to the
user-definable entries (21, 22, 23 and G) and highlights the appropriate
row.

17-28 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Morning Drilling Report

The description pick list button calls up the extended pick list dialogue box,
which allows the addition of a user-defined operation by way of CODE and
DESCRIPTION fields and up and down arrows.
Selecting a row on the time distribution window allows the duration
(HOURS) textfield to be amended if required.

Surveys
The survey window is a read only repeat of the data recorded
during the report interval in the directional survey calculator
application. After examining it, the user may close the window or select
COMPLETE and then close the window to return to the main window.

Figure 17-36
Survey Data

Coring
This window enables the user to edit and add core details for the
current well. The details are displayed in tabular form, with one
core to each table. Coring data will be imported from the coring report if it
is available, otherwise the text fields will be empty when the window
opens.

Reference Guide 17-29


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Morning Drilling Report DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

The RECOVERY % value will be calculated automatically as soon as


enough data is available and the user clicks on SAVE.

Figure 17-37
Core Details

Special feature
DELETE CORE— removes the current core’s details from the database

Comments
This window is for the free text entry of comments on the current
morning drilling report. The user can start work in this window
by importing data from the preceding report if necessary. The data will
overwrite anything entered during the current session.

Figure 17-38
Comments Window

17-30 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Morning Drilling Report

Generating Reports
Print Setup Window
This window allows the user to choose whether to print one individual
morning report or a selection of multiple reports. The selection in both
single and multiple report output is made from pick lists of morning report
numbers and dates.
When a user wishes to output several reports, a range of reports must be
specified, using the FROM and TO pick list buttons.

Figure 17-39
Print Setup

Plot Overlay Dialog Box


For DEAP v3.0, a new dialog box has been added for use when generating
days versus depth reports, cost versus depth reports, and cost versus days
report.
The plot overlay dialog box provides the user with a range of options for
the data to appear in the report, including actual data from the morning
drilling report itself, planned data from offication durations and costs,
technical limit based (durations and costs based on the technical limit for
the official plan), target (same criteria as technical limit), and incentive (as
above).

Figure 17-40
Overlay Plot
dialog box

Reference Guide 17-31


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Morning Drilling Report DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Reports
Morning Drilling Report - Current

17-32 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Morning Drilling Report

Days vs. Depth

Reference Guide 17-33


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Morning Drilling Report DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Cost vs. Dept

17-34 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Morning Drilling Report

Cost vs. Days

Reference Guide 17-35


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Morning Drilling Report DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Current IADC

17-36 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Chapter 18

Morning Completions Report

This application enables the user to create and edit the


morning completions report. The user can also review
earlier reports, although if they have been committed they
are regarded as the formal record of the activity on the rig
and they cannot be edited.

Reference Guide 18-1


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Morning Completions Report DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Overview
The morning completions report application is similar in many respects to
the morning drilling report, indeed they have many windows in common.
In this section of the user manual, only those elements which are specific to
the completions report will be documented — the user is referred to the
morning drilling report section for information on all other windows.

Links with Other Applications


The morning completions report draws information from several other
applications to reduce the amount of data entry required from the user.
Some of the applications are optional, so they will not always be present to
provide data; in this case, the user will have to enter the data manually.
The applications which send data to the morning drilling report are:
• Bit/BHA actual
• Daily cost tracking (if it has been used)
• Directional survey calculator
• Drilling fluid actual (if it has been used)
• Casing actual (if it has been used)
• Progress log
• Rig initialization
• Stock control (if it has been used)
• Geology actual (if it has been used)
• Well initialization
• FIT report

Moving through Lists of Entries


Many of the windows in this application present lists of entries. At the top
of each list, there will be a line giving the numbers of the visible entries and
an indication of the total number of entries in the list. The up and down
arrow buttons enable the user to scroll through the list, a page at a time.

18-2 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Morning Completions Report

COMPLETE Buttons
Most of the morning report generator windows have COMPLETE buttons.
The buttons become active when all mandatory data entry text fields have
been completed. They save the data to the database and close the current
sub-application window.
Text fields in windows which have been completed are still editable, by re-
opening the window and editing them in the normal way. However, once a
report has been committed by clicking the button on the main window, all
text fields become read-only.

Navigation

Main
Window

Well Pumps Bit BHA Drilling Mud


Status Fluids Log

Additional Bit Condition/ Additional Additional Additional


Performance
IADC Details IADC Details IADC Details
IADC Details

Well Cost Safety Weather Bulk Initialization Personnel


Control

Additional Additional Bulk Materials


Storage Configuration

Rig Response Logistics Progress Survey Coring Comments


Log

Additional IADC Details

Reports: Days vs. Depth

Current MDR Current IADC Cost vs. Depth

Morning Reports IADC Reports Cost vs. Time

Reference Guide 18-3


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Morning Completions Report DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Navigation in the morning report application is mostly between the main


window and the sub-applications. Only bit, bulk materials and initialization
details can call up further levels of sub-application, although where
additional data entry has been set up, some windows will contain an
ADDITIONAL button which calls a further data entry window.

Application Main Window


The main window gives the user access to all of the appropriate reporting
categories and to previous morning reports.
As data entry to each of the reporting categories is completed, the user
clicks the category’s COMPLETE button and the corresponding icon on
the main window will change from black on white to white on black —
enabling the user see which aspects of the report still need to be completed.
The completion, production and comments sections of the report are not
mandatory.
If the most recent report has been committed, the application will assume
that the user intends to start a new one: the new report will run from 0600
hours on the current date.

Note: If a report is incomplete, it may still be saved to the


database without having been committed.

Figure 18-1
Main Window

18-4 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Morning Completions Report

Special features
COMMIT… — instructs the system to carry out data checks on the data
entered in each of the reporting categories and, if the data is acceptable and
complete, mark the report permanently as read-only.
INITIALIZATION DETAILS… — opens the initialization details
window.

Initialization Details
The initialization window contains the dates of when the rig arrived on
location, when it was spudded in and when the program started. The dates
form the basis for subsequent calculations about the duration of the
program: depth versus days, depth versus time, days from spud and AFE
start. The window also provides access to the bulk storage configuration
window.
The data in this window will normally be written only once per well.

Figure 18-2
Initialization
Data

Special features
DATE ON LOCATION — completed automatically with data from the rig
initialisation application.
BULK STORAGE CONFIGURATION… — opens the bulk storage
configuration window.

Completion
This completion window enables the user to enter completion
details of the well and is divided into four distinct areas: tree
details, head details, tubing details and packer details.
Entry of data into the tubing and packer areas is accomplished by way of
the ADD and DELETE buttons plus the up and down arrows which are
included above the details fields themselves.

Reference Guide 18-5


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Morning Completions Report DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

Figure 18-3
Completions

Production
The window allows the user to enter perforation interval details
such as top and bottom depths (MD and TVD) shot density,
reservoir pressure, overbalance, depth of fill, gun type and size, number of
holes and whether or not it is zone tested.
As with the completion window, entry of data is accomplished by way of
the ADD and DELETE buttons plus the up and down arrows which are
included above the details fields themselves.

Figure 18-4
Production

18-6 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual Morning Completions Report

Report
Sample Morning Completions Report

Reference Guide 18-7


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997
Morning Completions Report DEAP 3.0 User Reference Manual

•Notes•

18-8 Baker Hughes INTEQ


80494H-001 Rev. B / January 1997

You might also like